b 7128511

228
FAX Option Type 3245 Operating Instructions Facsimile Reference <Advanced Features> Read this manual carefully before you use this machine and keep it handy for future reference. For safe and correct use, be sure to read the Safety Information in the “General Settings Guide” before using the machine. Transmission Mode Checking and Canceling Transmission Files Communication Information Other Transmission Features Reception Features Fax via Computer Simplifying the Operation Facsimile Features Administrator Setting Solving Operation Problems Appendix

Upload: mmdf20

Post on 22-Dec-2015

4 views

Category:

Documents


0 download

DESCRIPTION

Lanier Copier Machine

TRANSCRIPT

Page 1: b 7128511

Paper type: OK Prince Eco G100(55kg), Paper Thickness=80 µm // Pages in book=224 // Print scale=81%Gap (when printed at 81% scale) = Pages in book × Paper thickness / 2 = 8.960000 mm

FAX Option Type 3245Operating Instructions

Facsimile Reference <Advanced Features>

B7128511

FAX

Option Type 3245

Operating Instructions

Facsimile Reference <A

dvanced Features>

FAX Option Type 3245

Operating Instructions

Facsimile Reference<Advanced Features>

Read this manual carefully before you use this machine and keep it handy for future reference. For safe and correct use, be sure to read the SafetyInformation in the “General Settings Guide” before using the machine.

Transmission Mode

Checking and Canceling Transmission Files

Communication Information

Other Transmission Features

Reception Features

Fax via Computer

Simplifying the Operation

Facsimile Features

Administrator Setting

Solving Operation Problems

Appendix

Printed in Japan

EN USA B712-8511

Page 2: b 7128511

Paper type: OK Prince Eco G100(55kg), Paper Thickness=80 µm // Pages in book=224 // Print scale=81%Gap (when printed at 81% scale) = Pages in book × Paper thickness / 2 = 8.960000 mm

Introduction

This manual contains detailed instructions and notes on the operation and use of this machine. For yoursafety and benefit, read this manual carefully before using the machine. Keep this manual in a handyplace for quick reference.

Notes

Some illustrations in this manual might be slightly different from the machine.

Certain options might not be available in some countries. For details, please contact your local dealer.

Two kinds of size notation are employed in this manual. With this machine refer to the inch version.

Important

Contents of this manual are subject to change without prior notice. In no event will the company be li-able for direct, indirect, special, incidental, or consequential damages as a result of handling or oper-ating the machine.

Trademarks

Microsoft®, Windows® and Windows NT® are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in theUnited States and/or other countries.

Adobe® and Acrobat® are registered trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated.

Ethernet is a registered trademark of Xerox Corporation.

Other product names used herein are for identification purposes only and might be trademarks of theirrespective companies. We disclaim any and all rights to those marks.

Note

The proper names of the Windows operating systems are as follows:

• The product name of Windows® 95 is Microsoft® ScanRouter.

• The product name of Windows® 98 is Microsoft® Windows 98.

• The product name of Windows® Me is Microsoft® Windows Millennium Edition (Windows Me).

• The product names of Windows® 2000 are as follows:Microsoft® Windows® 2000 Advanced ServerMicrosoft® Windows® 2000 ServerMicrosoft® Windows® 2000 Professional

• The product names of Windows® XP are as follows:Microsoft® Windows® XP ProfessionalMicrosoft® Windows® XP Home Edition

• The product names of the Windows ServerTM 2003 are as follows:Microsoft® Windows ServerTM 2003 Standard EditionMicrosoft® Windows ServerTM 2003 Enterprise EditionMicrosoft® Windows ServerTM 2003 Web Edition

• The product names of Windows NT® 4.0 are as follows:Microsoft® Windows NT® Server 4.0

• Microsoft® Windows NT® Workstation 4.0

Copyright © 2005

Page 3: b 7128511

i

Manuals for This Machine

The following manuals describe the operational procedures of this machine. Forparticular functions, see the relevant parts of the manual.

Note❒ Manuals provided are specific to machine type.❒ Adobe Acrobat Reader/Adobe Reader is necessary to view the manuals as a

PDF file.❒ Two CD-ROMs are provided:

• CD-ROM 1“Operating Instructions”• CD-ROM 2“Scanner Driver and Document Management Utility”

❖❖❖❖ General Settings GuideProvides an overview of the machine and describes System Settings (such asTray Paper Settings), Document Server functions, and troubleshooting. Refer to this manual for Address Book procedures such as registering faxnumbers, e-mail addresses, and user codes.

❖❖❖❖ Security ReferenceThis manual is for administrators of this machine. It describes security func-tions that the administrators can use to protect data from being tampered, orprevent the machine from unauthorized use. Also refer to this manual for theprocedures for registering administrators, as well as setting user and admin-istrator authentication.

❖❖❖❖ Network Guide (PDF file - CD-ROM1)Provides information about configuring and operating the printer in a net-work environment or using software.This manual covers all models, and therefore contains functions and settingsthat may not be available for your model.Images, illustrations, functions, and supported operating systems may differfrom those of your model.

❖❖❖❖ Copy ReferenceDescribes operations, functions, and troubleshooting for the machine’s copierfunction.

❖❖❖❖ Facsimile Reference <Basic Features>Describes operations, functions, and troubleshooting for the machine’s fac-simile function.

❖❖❖❖ Facsimile Reference<Advanced Features>(this manual)Describes advanced facsimile functions such as line settings and proceduresfor registering IDs.

❖❖❖❖ Printer ReferenceDescribes system settings, operations, functions, and trouble shooting for themachine’s printer function.

JupterC2_Fax_EN-F_FM.book Page i Monday, November 29, 2004 3:48 PM

Page 4: b 7128511

ii

❖❖❖❖ Scanner Reference (PDF file - CD-ROM1) Describes operations, functions, and troubleshooting for the machine’s scan-ner function.

❖❖❖❖ Manuals for DeskTopBinder LiteDeskTopBinder Lite is a utility included on the CD-ROM labeled “ScannerDriver and Document Management Utility”.• DeskTopBinder Lite Setup Guide (PDF file - CD-ROM2)

Describes installation of, and the operating environment for DeskTop-Binder Lite in detail. This guide can be displayed from the [Setup] dialogbox when DeskTopBinder Lite is installed.

• DeskTopBinder Introduction Guide (PDF file - CD-ROM2)Describes operations of DeskTopBinder Lite and provides an overview ofits functions. This guide is added to the [Start] menu when DeskTopBinderLite is installed.

• Auto Document Link Guide (PDF file - CD-ROM2) Describes operations and functions of Auto Document Link installed withDeskTopBinder Lite. This guide is added to the [Start] menu when Desk-TopBinder Lite is installed.

❖❖❖❖ Other manuals• PostScript 3 Supplement (PDF file - CD-ROM1)• Unix Supplement (Available from an authorized dealer, or as a PDF file on

our Web site.)

Note❒ The following software products are referred to using a general names:

• DeskTopBinder Lite and DeskTopBinder Professional → DeskTopBinder• ScanRouter V2 Lite and ScanRouter EX Professional (optional) → the Scan-

Router delivery software• SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin and SmartDeviceMonitor for Client →

SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin/Client

JupterC2_Fax_EN-F_FM.book Page ii Monday, November 29, 2004 3:48 PM

Page 5: b 7128511

iii

TABLE OF CONTENTSManuals for This Machine ...................................................................................... iHow to Read This Manual .....................................................................................1

Symbols .....................................................................................................................1

1. Transmission Mode

Sending at a Specific Time (Send Later) .............................................................3Sender Settings......................................................................................................5Priority Transmission............................................................................................8Confidential Transmission....................................................................................9Polling Transmission...........................................................................................11

Polling Transmission Clear Report...........................................................................13Polling Reception.................................................................................................14

Polling Reserve Report ............................................................................................16Polling Result Report ...............................................................................................16

2. Checking and Canceling Transmission Files

Displaying Confirmation of Transmission.........................................................18Canceling a Transmission ..................................................................................19Deleting a Destination .........................................................................................20Adding a Destination ...........................................................................................21Changing the Transmission Time ......................................................................22Printing a File .......................................................................................................23Resending a File ..................................................................................................24Printing a List of Files in Memory (Print TX File List).......................................25

3. Communication Information

Printing the Journal .............................................................................................27Journal .....................................................................................................................29

Checking the Transmission Result (TX File Status).........................................31Checking the Reception Result (RX File Status) ..............................................32Displaying the Memory Status............................................................................33Printing/Deleting Received and Stored Documents (Print/Delete Stored RX File) ...34

Printing Received and Stored Documents ...............................................................34Deleting Received and Stored Documents ..............................................................35

Printing a Confidential Message ........................................................................36Confidential File Report............................................................................................37

Printing a File Received with Memory Lock......................................................38Personal Boxes....................................................................................................40

Personal Boxes ........................................................................................................40Printing Personal Box Messages .............................................................................41

Information Boxes ...............................................................................................42Information Boxes ....................................................................................................42Storing Messages in Information Boxes...................................................................42Printing Information Box Messages .........................................................................44Deleting Information Box Messages ........................................................................45

JupterC2_Fax_EN-F_FM.book Page iii Monday, November 29, 2004 3:48 PM

Page 6: b 7128511

iv

4. Other Transmission Features

Handy Dialing Functions.....................................................................................47Chain Dial.................................................................................................................47

(Example) 01133-1-555333...................................................................................47Redial .......................................................................................................................47

Advanced Features..............................................................................................49SUB Code ................................................................................................................49

SID Code ...............................................................................................................50SEP Code ................................................................................................................50

PWD Code.............................................................................................................51Transfer Request .....................................................................................................52

With transfer requests set in the system settings ..................................................55On Hook Dial ........................................................................................................56Manual Dial ...........................................................................................................58Changing the Line Port .......................................................................................59Sub Transmission Mode .....................................................................................61

Book Fax ..................................................................................................................61Two-Sided Transmission (Double-Sided Transmission) ..........................................62Standard Message Stamp........................................................................................64Sending an Auto Document .....................................................................................65

Printing documents stored as Auto Documents ....................................................66Sending a Stored File...............................................................................................67

Sending stored documents....................................................................................67Printing stored documents.....................................................................................70

Stamp.......................................................................................................................72Transmission Options ..............................................................................................73

Fax Header Print ...................................................................................................73Label Insertion .......................................................................................................73Reduced Image Transmission...............................................................................74Auto Reduce..........................................................................................................74Default ID Transmission ........................................................................................74Selecting transmission options for a single transmission ......................................75

More Transmission Functions............................................................................77If Memory Runs Out While Storing an Original ........................................................77Parallel Memory Transmission.................................................................................77Checking the Transmission Result...........................................................................78Automatic Redial ......................................................................................................78Batch Transmission..................................................................................................78Dual Access .............................................................................................................78Transmission with Image Rotation ...........................................................................79Simultaneous Broadcast ..........................................................................................79JBIG Transmission...................................................................................................79Transmitting Journal by E-mail.................................................................................80

Journal by E-mail...................................................................................................80Printed Report ......................................................................................................81

Memory Storage Report...........................................................................................81Communication Result Report (Memory Transmission) ..........................................81Communication Failure Report ................................................................................82Immediate TX Result Report (Immediate Transmission) .........................................82

JupterC2_Fax_EN-F_FM.book Page iv Monday, November 29, 2004 3:48 PM

Page 7: b 7128511

v

5. Reception Features

Reception..............................................................................................................83Immediate Reception ...............................................................................................83Memory Reception ...................................................................................................83Substitute Reception ................................................................................................85

Receiving messages unconditionally.....................................................................85Receiving messages according to parameter-specified settings...........................86

Reception Functions ...........................................................................................87Transfer Station........................................................................................................87

Transfer Result Report ..........................................................................................88Transfer Result Report (transfer request by e-mail) ..............................................89

Forwarding Received Documents ............................................................................90Routing Received Documents with SUB Code ........................................................91Transferring Received Documents...........................................................................91SMTP Reception Using Internet Fax........................................................................92

Routing E-mail Received via SMTP ......................................................................93JBIG Reception ........................................................................................................95Auto Fax Reception Power-up .................................................................................95

Printing Options...................................................................................................96Print Completion Beep .............................................................................................96Checkered Mark.......................................................................................................96Center Mark .............................................................................................................96Reception Time ........................................................................................................97Two-Sided Printing...................................................................................................97

180-Degree Rotation Printing ................................................................................98Multi-copy Reception................................................................................................98Image Rotation.........................................................................................................99Combine Two Originals............................................................................................99Page Separation and Length Reduction ...............................................................100Reverse Order Printing ..........................................................................................100Page Reduction......................................................................................................101TSI Print (Transmitting Subscriber Identification Print) ..........................................101When There Is No Paper of the Correct Size.........................................................101

Setting priority trays.............................................................................................102Just size printing..................................................................................................103Having Incoming Messages Printed on Paper from the Bypass Tray .................103

Where Incoming Message are Delivered - Output Tray..................................105Specifying Tray for Lines........................................................................................105Tray Shift................................................................................................................105

6. Fax via Computer

Sending Fax Documents from Computers ......................................................107Before Use .............................................................................................................108Installing the Software............................................................................................108

Auto run program.................................................................................................108Installing individual applications ..........................................................................109

Applications Stored on the CD-ROM .....................................................................109LAN-Fax Driver....................................................................................................109Address Book ......................................................................................................110LAN-Fax Cover Sheet Editor ...............................................................................110

JupterC2_Fax_EN-F_FM.book Page v Monday, November 29, 2004 3:48 PM

Page 8: b 7128511

vi

Setting LAN-Fax Driver Properties.........................................................................110Setting Print Properties........................................................................................110Making Settings for Option Configuration............................................................111

Basic Transmission ................................................................................................112Specifying options ...............................................................................................114Confirming Transmission Results by E-mail........................................................116

LAN-Fax Result Report ..........................................................................................118Printing and Saving ................................................................................................118Editing Address Book.............................................................................................118Editing Fax Cover Sheets ......................................................................................121

Creating a cover sheet ........................................................................................121Attaching a created cover sheet ..........................................................................121

LAN-Fax Operation Messages...............................................................................122Viewing Fax Information Using a Web Browser .............................................123

Viewing, Printing, and Deleting Received Fax Messages Using a Web Image Monitor ...123Viewing received fax messages using a Web browser .......................................123Printing fax information using a Web browser .....................................................124Deleting fax information using a Web browser ....................................................124

Programming Destination Information from Web Browser.....................................125Delivering Files Received by Fax .....................................................................127

7. Simplifying the Operation

Programs ............................................................................................................129Registering and Changing Keystroke Programs ....................................................129

Registering a priority function using a program...................................................130Changing a program name..................................................................................131

Deleting a Program ................................................................................................131Using a Program ....................................................................................................132

Using the Document Server..............................................................................133Storing a Document ...............................................................................................134Changing Information of Stored Documents ..........................................................136Deleting a Stored Document ..................................................................................138Managing Documents Saved in the Document Server from a Computer ..............139

Using DeskTopBinder..........................................................................................139Using a Web browser ..........................................................................................139

8. Facsimile Features

Function List ......................................................................................................141Accessing User Tools (Facsimile Features)....................................................144

Quitting Default Settings ........................................................................................144General Settings/Adjustment .................................................................................144Reception Settings .................................................................................................147E-mail Settings .......................................................................................................148IP-Fax Settings.......................................................................................................150

JupterC2_Fax_EN-F_FM.book Page vi Monday, November 29, 2004 3:48 PM

Page 9: b 7128511

vii

9. Administrator Setting

Administrator Tools List ...................................................................................155Using Administrator Settings ...........................................................................157

Programming, Changing, and Deleting Standard Messages .................................157Storing, Changing, and Deleting an Auto Document .............................................158

Deleting an Auto Document.................................................................................159Programming, Changing and Deleting a Scan Size...............................................160

Deleting a scan size ............................................................................................161Printing Journal ......................................................................................................162Counters.................................................................................................................162Forwarding .............................................................................................................162

Programming an End Receiver ...........................................................................163Quitting the forwarding function...........................................................................164Forwarding Mark..................................................................................................164

Memory Lock..........................................................................................................165ECM (Error Correction Mode) ................................................................................165User Parameters ....................................................................................................166

Changing the User Parameters ...........................................................................170Printing the User Parameter List .........................................................................171

Special Senders to Treat Differently ......................................................................171Authorized Reception ..........................................................................................172Forwarding...........................................................................................................173Reception File Print Quantity...............................................................................173Print 2 Sided ........................................................................................................173Memory Lock .......................................................................................................174Reception Reverse Printing.................................................................................174Paper Tray...........................................................................................................174Programming/Changing Special Senders ...........................................................174Programming Initial Set Up of a Special Sender .................................................178Deleting a Special Sender ...................................................................................180Printing the Special Sender List ..........................................................................180

Box Settings ...........................................................................................................180Programming/changing Personal Boxes .............................................................181Deleting Personal Boxes .....................................................................................183Programming/changing Information Boxes .........................................................184Deleting Information Boxes .................................................................................185Programming/changing Transfer Boxes ..............................................................186Deleting Transfer Boxes ......................................................................................189Printing the Box List.............................................................................................190

Transfer Report ......................................................................................................190Programming a Confidential ID ..............................................................................191Programming a Polling ID ......................................................................................192Programming a Memory Lock ID ...........................................................................192Selecting Dial/Push Phone.....................................................................................193Storing or Printing Received Documents ...............................................................193

Reception Report e-mail......................................................................................194Setting a User for Viewing Received and Stored Documents................................195Menu Protection Settings .......................................................................................196

JupterC2_Fax_EN-F_FM.book Page vii Monday, November 29, 2004 3:48 PM

Page 10: b 7128511

viii

10.Solving Operation Problems

When an Error Report is Printed ......................................................................197Turning Off the Main Power / When a Power Failure Occurs ........................198When an Error Occurs Using Internet Fax ......................................................199

Error Mail Notification.............................................................................................199Error Report (E-Mail) ..............................................................................................199Server-Generated Error E-mail ..............................................................................199

11.Appendix

Connecting the Machine to a Telephone Line and Telephone ......................201Connecting the Telephone Line .............................................................................201Selecting the Line Type..........................................................................................202Connecting the Optional Handset or an External Telephone.................................202

Optional Equipment...........................................................................................204Expansion Memory (32MB: DIMM) ........................................................................204Handset..................................................................................................................204Extra G3 Interface Unit ..........................................................................................204

Specifications.....................................................................................................205Compatible Machines.............................................................................................207Acceptable Types of Originals ...............................................................................208

Acceptable original sizes .....................................................................................208Paper size and scanned area..............................................................................208

Original sizes difficult to detect...............................................................................210Maximum Values................................................................................................212

INDEX....................................................................................................... 213

JupterC2_Fax_EN-F_FM.book Page viii Monday, November 29, 2004 3:48 PM

Page 11: b 7128511

1

How to Read This Manual

Symbols

In this manual, the following symbols are used:

R WARNING:This symbol indicates a potentially hazardous situation that might result indeath or serious injury when you misuse the machine without following the in-structions under this symbol. Be sure to read the instructions, all of which are in-cluded in “Safety Information”, General Settings Guide.

R CAUTION:This symbol indicates a potentially hazardous situation that might result in mi-nor or moderate injury or property damage that does not involve personal injurywhen you misuse the machine without following the instructions under thissymbol. Be sure to read the instructions, all of which are included in “Safety In-formation”, General Settings Guide.* The statements above are notes for your safety.

ImportantIf this instruction is not followed, paper might be misfed, originals might bedamaged, or data might be lost. Be sure to read this.

PreparationThis symbol indicates information or preparations required prior to operating.

NoteThis symbol indicates precautions for operation, or actions to take after abnor-mal operation.

LimitationThis symbol indicates numerical limits, functions that cannot be used together,or conditions under which a particular function cannot be used.

ReferenceThis symbol indicates a reference.

[ ]Keys that appear on the machine's display panel.

[ ]Keys and buttons that appear on the computer's display.

{ }Keys built into the machine's control panel.

JupterC2_Fax_EN-F_FM.book Page 1 Monday, November 29, 2004 3:48 PM

Page 12: b 7128511

2

JupterC2_Fax_EN-F_FM.book Page 2 Monday, November 29, 2004 3:48 PM

Page 13: b 7128511

3

1. Transmission Mode

Sending at a Specific Time (Send Later)

Using this function, you can instructthe machine to delay transmission ofyour fax message until a specified lat-er time. This allows you to take ad-vant age of o f f -p eak te lep ho necharges without having to be by themachine at the time.

If you have a non-urgent fax, selectSend Later with Economy Transmis-sion when you scan it. Faxes will bequeued in memory and sent duringEconomy Transmission Time.

Important❒ After the machine has been switched

off for about one hour, all fax mes-sages stored in memory are lost. Ifmessages are lost for this reason, aPower Failure Report is automati-cally printed when the operationswitch is turned on. Use this reportto identify lost messages.

Limitation❒ This function is unavailable with

Immediate Transmission. UseMemory Transmission.

Note❒ You can specify a time within 24

hours.❒ If the current time shown is not

correct, change it. See “Timer Set-ting”, General Settings Guide.

❒ If the document is sent before thespecified time, the CommunicationResult Report is printed and the jobis completed.

❒ For convenience, you can programthe time when your phone chargesbecome cheaper as the EconomyTransmission Time. See p.146“Program Economy Time”.

❒ You can program one of the QuickOperation keys with operations forthis function. Using the quick op-eration key allows you to omit stepB. See p.144 “General Settings/Ad-justment”.

AAAA Place the original, and then selectthe scan settings you require.

Referencep.13 “Placing Originals”, Fac-simile Reference <Basic Features>

p.30 “Scan Settings”, FacsimileReference <Basic Features>

BBBB Press [Transmission Mode].

FaxAdEN_Chapter-1 Page 3 Wednesday, January 19, 2005 2:32 PM

Page 14: b 7128511

Transmission Mode

4

1

CCCC Press [Send Later].

DDDD Enter the time (12 hour format)using the number keys, and thenselect [AM] or [PM]. Then, press[OK].

The specified time is shown abovethe highlighted [Send Later].

Note❒ Press [Economy Time] to specify

the economy time.❒ When entering numbers small-

er than 10, add a zero at the be-ginning.

❒ If you make a mistake, press[Clear] or the {{{{Clear/Stop}}}} key be-fore pressing [OK], and then tryagain.

❒ To cancel Send Later, press[Cancel]. The display returns tothat of step C.

EEEE Press [OK].

The standby display appears.

Note❒ To check the settings, press

[Transmission Mode].

FFFF Specify a destination, and thenpress the {{{{Start}}}} key.

Note❒ You can cancel the transmission

setup for Send Later. See p.19“Canceling a Transmission”.

JupterC2_Fax_EN-F_FM.book Page 4 Monday, November 29, 2004 3:48 PM

Page 15: b 7128511

Sender Settings

5

1

Sender Settings

This function tells receivers the faxsender's identity.If the sender's e-mail address is regis-tered in the destination list, the send-er can receive an Immediate TXResult Report by e-mail.Also, if you enable the Stamp SenderName, the registered sender's name(user name) appears on the receiver'ssheet, lists, or report.

PreparationBefore using this function, youmust register senders in the desti-nation list and specify Use Nameas [Sender]. See “Fax Destination”,General Settings Guide.

Note❒ When user authentication is set,

the user logged in is set as sender.An Immediate TX Result Report issent to the logged-in user's e-mailaddress.

❒ You can program one of the QuickOperation keys with operations forSender Settings. Quick Operationkeys allow you to omit step B. Seep.144 “General Settings/Adjust-ment”.

❒ You can use communication man-agement report, etc. to check usagestatus by specified user. Whenuser authentication is set, you cancheck usage by logged-in users.See p.162 “Printing Journal” .When User ID is set to sender, youcan count the number of times ofuses by each user. See “Authenti-cation Information”, General Set-tings Guide.

AAAA Place the original, and then selectthe necessary settings.

Referencep.13 “Placing Originals”, Fac-simile Reference <Basic Features>

p.30 “Scan Settings”, FacsimileReference <Basic Features>

BBBB Press [Transmission Mode].

CCCC Press [Sender Settings].

DDDD Select a sender.

Note❒ When a protection code for des-

tination is set, the followingscreen appears. Enter the pro-tection code for destination us-ing the number keys, and thenpress [OK].

JupterC2_Fax_EN-F_FM.book Page 5 Monday, November 29, 2004 3:48 PM

Page 16: b 7128511

Transmission Mode

6

1

EEEE Confirm the selected sender, andthen press [OK].

FFFF Select [On] or [Off] for the StampSender Name.

Printing on the Receiver's Sheet

If you enable this function, thesender's name (user name) ap-pears on the receiver's sheet, lists,and report.A Select [On] for the Stamp Send-

er Name function.

When an E-mail address is Registered

If the sender's e-mail address isregistered you can specify whetheror not to send the transmission re-sult by e-mail to the sender. If youenable this function, sent to theregistered mail address.

Note❒ When a user logs in with User

ID, the Immediate TX Result Re-port is sent by e-mail to thelogged-in user.

A Select [Yes] or [No] for the E-mail TX Results function.

GGGG Press [OK].

The display returns to that of StepC.

Note❒ The selected sender's name ap-

pears above [Sender Settings].The sender name is displayed inup to 14 characters, followed byan ellipsis (. . . ).

JupterC2_Fax_EN-F_FM.book Page 6 Monday, November 29, 2004 3:48 PM

Page 17: b 7128511

Sender Settings

7

1

HHHH Press [OK].

The standby display appears.

Note❒ To check the settings, press

[Transmission Mode].

IIII Specify the destination, and thenpress the {{{{Start}}}} key.

Note❒ To cancel the Sender Settings,

cancel the transmission. Seep.19 “Canceling a Transmis-sion”.

JupterC2_Fax_EN-F_FM.book Page 7 Monday, November 29, 2004 3:48 PM

Page 18: b 7128511

Transmission Mode

8

1

Priority Transmission

Documents you send with MemoryTransmission are sent in the orderthey are scanned. Therefore, if severalmessages are queued in memory, thenext document will not be sent imme-diately. However, by using this func-tion you can have your message sentbefore other queued messages.

Limitation❒ This function is not available with

Immediate Transmission. If thisfunction is selected, the machineautomatically switches to MemoryTransmission.

Note❒ If there is already a message stored

with this function or a transmis-sion in progress, your message willbe sent after that message has beentransmitted.

AAAA Place the original, and then selectthe scan settings you require.

Referencep.13 “Placing Originals”, Fac-simile Reference <Basic Features>p.30 “Scan Settings”, FacsimileReference <Basic Features>

BBBB Press [Transmission Mode].

CCCC Press [Priority TX], and then press[OK].

The standby display appears.

Note❒ To check the settings, press

[Transmission Mode].

DDDD Specify the destination, and thenpress the {{{{Start}}}} key.

Note❒ Press [Change / Stop TX File] to

cancel the transmission. Seep.19 “Canceling a Transmis-sion”.

JupterC2_Fax_EN-F_FM.book Page 8 Monday, November 29, 2004 3:48 PM

Page 19: b 7128511

Confidential Transmission

9

1

Confidential Transmission

If you want to limit who views yourmessage, use this function. The mes-sage will be stored in memory at theother end and not printed until an IDis entered.

There are two types of ConfidentialTransmission:

❖❖❖❖ Default IDIt is not necessary to enter an IDwhen transmitting.The other party can print the mes-sage by entering the ConfidentialID programmed in their machine.

❖❖❖❖ ID Override: Should you want to send a confi-dential message to a particular per-son at the other end, you canspecify the Confidential ID that thereceiver has to enter to see thatmessage. Before you send the mes-sage, do not forget to tell the re-ceiver the ID that must be enteredto print the message.

Limitation❒ The destination machine must be

of the same manufacturer andhave the Confidential Receptionfunction.

❒ The destination machine must haveenough memory available.

❒ This function is not available withInternet Fax.

Note❒ We recommend you program the

Confidential ID in this machine be-forehand. See p.191 “Program-ming a Confidential ID”.

❒ An ID can be any 4-digit number(except 0000).

❒ If the destination machine is not ofthe same manufacturer, you canuse Confidential Transmissionwith “SUB Code”. See p.49 “SUBCode”.

AAAA Place the original, and then selectthe scan settings you require.

Referencep.13 “Placing Originals”, Fac-simile Reference <Basic Features>

p.30 “Scan Settings”, FacsimileReference <Basic Features>

BBBB Press [Transmission Mode].

CCCC Press [Confidential TX].

GFSINS0N

JupterC2_Fax_EN-F_FM.book Page 9 Monday, November 29, 2004 3:48 PM

Page 20: b 7128511

Transmission Mode

10

1

DDDD Depending on the ConfidentialTransmission type, use one of thefollowing procedures:

Default ID

A Check that [Default ID] has beenselected, and then press [OK].

Note❒ To cancel Confidential Trans-

mission, press [Cancel]. Thedisplay returns to that of stepC.

Override ID

A Select [ID Override: ].

B Enter the Confidential ID (4-digit number) using the num-ber keys, and then press [OK].

“ID Override: ” and the enteredConfidential ID are shownabove the highlighted [Confiden-tial TX].

Note❒ If you make a mistake, press

[Clear] or the {{{{Clear/Stop}}}} keybefore pressing [OK], andthen try again.

❒ To cancel Confidential Trans-mission, press [Cancel]. Thedisplay returns to that of stepC.

EEEE Press [OK].

The standby display appears.

Note❒ To check the settings, press

[Transmission Mode].

FFFF Dial, and then press the {{{{Start}}}}key.

Note❒ You can cancel the transmission

setup for Confidential Trans-mission. See p.19 “Canceling aTransmission”.

JupterC2_Fax_EN-F_FM.book Page 10 Monday, November 29, 2004 3:48 PM

Page 21: b 7128511

Polling Transmission

11

1

Polling Transmission

Use Polling Transmission when youwant to leave an original in the ma-chine memory for others to pick up.The message will be sent when theother party calls you up.

PreparationBefore using ID Polling Transmis-sion, you must register a pollingID. See p.192 “Programming aPolling ID”.

There are three types of PollingTransmission.

❖❖❖❖ Free Polling TransmissionIt is not necessary to enter the Poll-ing ID during the procedure.Anybody can poll the messagefrom your machine.

❖❖❖❖ Default ID TransmissionIt is not necessary to enter the Poll-ing ID during the procedure.The message will only be sent if thePolling ID of the machine trying topoll your message is the same asthe Polling ID stored in your ma-chine. Make sure in advance thatboth machines' Polling IDs areidentical.Before using Default ID Transmis-sion, you need to program the Poll-ing ID. See p.192 “Programming aPolling ID”.

❖❖❖❖ ID Override TransmissionYou must enter an Override Poll-ing ID unique to the transmission.This ID overrides the ID stored inthe machine. The user must supplythis ID when they poll your ma-chine. If the IDs match, the mes-sage is sent. Make sure in advancethe other end knows the ID you areusing.

Limitation❒ Polling Transmission is allowed only

if the receiver's machine has thePolling Reception function.

❒ Usually, only machines of the samemanufacturer that support PollingReception can perform ID PollingTransmission. However, when theInformation Box File function isused, and the other party's fax ma-chine supports Polling Transmis-sion and the SEP function, you canstill carry out Polling Transmissionwith an ID. See p.42 “InformationBoxes”.

❒ This function is not available withInternet Fax.

Note❒ Free Polling and Default ID Trans-

mission allow only one file to bestored in memory.

❒ ID Override Polling Transmissionallows a file to be stored in memo-ry for each ID; you can store up to400 files by changing IDs.

❒ When setting using default values,you can set whether a PollingTransmission file is deleted in UserParameters. See p.166 “User Pa-rameters” (switch 11, bit 7). Tosave a file for frequent sending, setto “Standby (Save)”.

JupterC2_Fax_EN-F_FM.book Page 11 Monday, November 29, 2004 3:48 PM

Page 22: b 7128511

Transmission Mode

12

1

❒ Polling Transmission Clear Reportallows you to verify Polling Trans-mission has taken place. See p.13“Polling Transmission Clear Re-port”. If E-mail TX Results is pro-grammed in a Quick Operationkey, you can select whether a re-port e-mail is sent after transmis-sion. The destination of this reportcan be selected from the e-mail ad-dresses in the destination list.

❒ You can program one of the QuickOperation keys with operations forthis function. Using this key allowsyou to omit step B. See p.144 “Gen-eral Settings/Adjustment”.

❒ The communication fee is chargedto the receiver.

AAAA Place the original, and then selectthe scan settings you require.

Referencep.13 “Placing Originals”, Fac-simile Reference <Basic Features>p.30 “Scan Settings”, FacsimileReference <Basic Features>

BBBB Press [Transmission Mode].

CCCC Press [Polling TX].

DDDD Depending on the Polling Trans-mission mode, use one of the fol-lowing procedures:

Free Polling Transmission

A Check that [Free Polling TX] is se-lected.

Default ID Transmission

A Select [Default ID TX].

ID Override Transmission

A Select [ID Override Transmission].

B Specify a 4-digit ID using thenumber keys and [A], [B], [C],[D], [E], and [F].

Note❒ A Polling ID may be any four

numbers (0 to 9) and charac-ters (A to F), except 0000 andFFFF.

❒ If you make a mistake, press[Clear] or the {{{{Clear/Stop}}}} key,and then try again.

JupterC2_Fax_EN-F_FM.book Page 12 Monday, November 29, 2004 3:48 PM

Page 23: b 7128511

Polling Transmission

13

1

EEEE Press [Only Once] or [Save] to deleteor save the file after transmission.

Note❒ To delete the original immedi-

ately after transmission, select[Only Once].

❒ To repeatedly send the original,select [Save].

❒ To cancel Polling Transmission,press [Cancel]. The display re-turns to that of step C.

FFFF Press [OK].

“pppppppppp” ap-pears.The type of Polling Transmission isshown above the highlighted [Poll-ing TX].

GGGG Press [OK].

Note❒ To check the settings, press

[Transmission Mode].

HHHH Press the {{{{Start}}}} key.

Note❒ You can cancel the transmission

setup for Polling Transmission.See p.19 “Canceling a Transmis-sion”.

Polling Transmission Clear Report

This report allows you to verify Poll-ing Transmission has taken place.If E-mail TX Results is programmedin a Quick Operation key, you canhave the report e-mail sent aftertransmission. See p.146 “Quick Oper-ation Key”.

Limitation❒ This report is not printed if the

User Parameters are set to allowthe stored originals to be repeated-ly sent (Save). See p.166 “User Pa-rameters” (switch 11, bit 7).

Note❒ You can turn this function on or off

with the User Parameters. Seep.166 “User Parameters” (switch03, bit 6).

❒ You can have a portion of the sentimage printed on the report withthe User Parameters. See p.166“User Parameters” (switch 04, bit7).

❒ You can check the result of PollingTransmission with the Journal. Seep.27 “Printing the Journal”

❒ To view the report without textdisruption, select a font of evencharacter width in your e-mail ap-plication's settings.

❒ You can display a destination withthe User Parameters. See p.166“User Parameters” (switch 04, bit4).

❒ You can indicate the receiving par-ty's information with the User Pa-r am e t e rs . Se e p . 1 66 “ U s erParameters” (switch 04, bit 5).

JupterC2_Fax_EN-F_FM.book Page 13 Monday, November 29, 2004 3:48 PM

Page 24: b 7128511

Transmission Mode

14

1

Polling Reception

Use this function to poll a messagefrom another terminal. You can alsopoll documents from many terminalswith only one operation (use Groupsand Keystroke Programs to fully ex-ploit this function).

PreparationBefore using ID Polling Transmis-sion, you must register a pollingID. See p.192 “Programming aPolling ID”.

There are two types of Polling Recep-tion.

❖❖❖❖ Default ID/Free Polling ReceptionUse this method for Free Polling orDefault ID Polling. If the Polling IDis programmed in your machine,any messages waiting in the trans-mitting machine with the same IDare received. If the other machinedoes not have any messages wait-ing with the same Polling ID, anymessages that do not require IDare received (Free Polling).

❖❖❖❖ ID Override Polling ReceptionYou must enter an Override Poll-ing ID unique to this transmission.This ID overrides the one stored inthis machine.Your machine will receive anymessages waiting in the transmit-ting machine that have matchingID's. If no ID's match, any messag-es that do not require IDs are re-ceived (Free Polling).

Limitation❒ Polling Reception requires that the

other machine is capable of PollingTransmission.

❒ Usually, you can only receive doc-uments with a Polling ID from ma-chines of the same manufacturerthat support the polling function.However, if the other party's faxmachine supports Polling Trans-missions and the SEP function, andalso has stored IDs, you can stillperform Polling Reception. Seep.50 “SEP Code”.

❒ This function is not available withInternet Fax.

Note❒ To receive a message sent by De-

fault ID Polling Transmission or IDOverride Polling Transmission, itis necessary to specify the samePolling ID as the sender's. FreePolling Transmission does not re-quire the same Polling ID.

JupterC2_Fax_EN-F_FM.book Page 14 Monday, November 29, 2004 3:48 PM

Page 25: b 7128511

Polling Reception

15

1

❒ Polling Result Report allows youto verify Polling Reception has tak-en place. See p.16 “Polling ResultReport”. If E-mail TX Results isprogrammed in a Quick Operationkey, you can select whether a re-port e-mail is sent after reception.The destination of this report canbe selected from the e-mail ad-dresses in the destination list.

❒ You can program one of the QuickOperation keys with operations forthis function. Using the key allowsyou to omit step A. See p.144 “Gen-eral Settings/Adjustment”.

AAAA Press [Transmission Mode].

BBBB Press [Polling RX].

CCCC Depending on which method youare using, select one of the follow-ing procedures:

Default ID/Free Polling Reception

A Check that [Default ID / Free Poll-ing RX] is selected, and thenpress [OK].

Note❒ To cancel Polling Reception,

press [Cancel]. The displayreturns to that of step B.

ID Override Polling Reception

A Select [ID Override Polling Recep-tion].

B Specify a 4-digit ID using thenumber keys and [A], [B], [C],[D], [E], and [F], and then press[OK].

“ID Override: ” and the enteredPolling ID are shown above thehighlighted [Polling RX].

Note❒ A Polling ID may be any four

numbers (0 to 9) and charac-ters (A to F), except 0000 andFFFF.

❒ If you make a mistake, press[Clear] or the {{{{Clear/Stop}}}} keybefore pressing [OK], andthen try again.

❒ To cancel Polling Reception,press [Cancel]. The displayreturns to that of step B.

DDDD Press [OK].

The standby display appears.

EEEE Dial, and then press the {{{{Start}}}}key.

JupterC2_Fax_EN-F_FM.book Page 15 Monday, November 29, 2004 3:48 PM

Page 26: b 7128511

Transmission Mode

16

1

Polling Reserve Report

This report is printed after Polling Re-ception has been set up.

Note❒ You can turn this function on or off

with the User Parameters. Seep.166 “User Parameters” (switch03, bit 3).

❒ You can have a destination dis-played with the User Parameters.See p.166 “User Parameters”(switch 04, bit 4).

❒ You can display a sender namewith the User Parameters. Seep.166 “User Parameters” (switch04, bit 5).

Polling Result Report

This report is printed after a PollingReception has been completed andshows its result.If E-mail TX Results is programmedin a Quick Operation key, you can se-lect whether a report e-mail is sent af-ter reception. See p.146 “QuickOperation Key”.

Note❒ You can also check the result of a

Polling Reception with the Journal.See p.27 “Printing the Journal”.

❒ You can turn this function on or offwith the User Parameters. Seep.166 “User Parameters” (switch03, bit 4).

❒ To view the report without textdisruption, select a font of evencharacter width in your e-mail ap-plication's settings.

❒ You can display a destination withthe User Parameters. See p.166“User Parameters” (switch 04, bit4).

❒ You can display a sender namewith the User Parameters. Seep.166 “User Parameters” (switch04, bit 5).

JupterC2_Fax_EN-F_FM.book Page 16 Monday, November 29, 2004 3:48 PM

Page 27: b 7128511

17

2. Checking and CancelingTransmission Files

After you have pressed the {{{{Start}}}} key (after scanning originals), you can checkand edit the destination or settings of Memory Transmission. You can also can-cel a transmission, change the settings of a transmission, print a stored file, printa list of stored files, and resend a file which the machine failed to transmit.• Memory Transmission • Internet Fax Transmission • Send Later• Sender Settings• Priority Transmission• Confidential Transmission • Polling Reception • Polling Transmission • Transfer Request

Note❒ If there are no files being sent, or stored by Memory Transmission, [Change /

Stop TX File] does not appear on the display.❒ You cannot check or edit a file being sent. Also a Confidential Transmission

file or stored file to be printed as a report cannot be checked or edited.❒ There are cases when a destination may not be selected as the destination ap-

pears as “*”, depending on the security settings.

JupterC2_Fax_EN-F_FM.book Page 17 Monday, November 29, 2004 3:48 PM

Page 28: b 7128511

Checking and Canceling Transmission Files

18

2

Displaying Confirmation of Transmission

AAAA Press [Change / Stop TX File].

BBBB Press [Check / Change Settings].

CCCC Select a file to check.

Note❒ If multiple destinations were

specified, only the destinationselected first appears.

❒ If multiple destinations werespecified, only the number ofunsent messages appears.

DDDD Confirm a transmission, and thenpress [Exit].

EEEE Press [Exit].

The standby display appears.

JupterC2_Fax_EN-F_FM.book Page 18 Monday, November 29, 2004 3:48 PM

Page 29: b 7128511

Canceling a Transmission

19

2

Canceling a Transmission

You can cancel transmission of a filewhen the file is being sent, stored inmemory, or fails to transmit. All thescanned data is deleted from memo-ry.You can cancel a file for MemoryTransmission. This function is usefulto cancel a transmission when younotice a mistake in destination orwith the originals after storing. Tocancel Memory Transmission, searchfor the file to be canceled among thefiles stored in memory, and then de-lete it.

Note❒ If you cancel a transmission while

the file is being sent, some pages ofyour file may have already beensent and will be received at theother end.

❒ If the transmission finishes whileyou are carrying out this proce-dure, transmission cannot be can-celed.

AAAA Press [Change / Stop TX File].

BBBB Select a file whose transmissionyou want to cancel.

Note❒ To display only the files being

sent, press [Files under TX].❒ If multiple destinations were

specified, only the number ofunsent messages appears.

❒ If multiple destinations werespecified, only one destinationnumber appears. To display alldestinations, press [Check /Change Settings].

CCCC Press [Stop Transmission].The selected file is deleted.

Note❒ To quit transmission cancel,

press [Save].❒ To cancel another transmission,

repeat from step B.

DDDD Press [Exit].The standby display appears.

JupterC2_Fax_EN-F_FM.book Page 19 Monday, November 29, 2004 3:48 PM

Page 30: b 7128511

Checking and Canceling Transmission Files

20

2

Deleting a Destination

You can delete destinations.

Note❒ If you delete a destination that is

the only destination for a transmis-sion, the transmission is canceled.

AAAA Press [Change / Stop TX File].

BBBB Press [Check / Change Settings].

CCCC Select the file from which youwant to delete a destination.

DDDD Press [Change] for the destinationyou want to delete.

Note❒ Press to switch the destina-

tion between fax number, Inter-net Fax address and IP-Faxaddress.

EEEE Press [Clear] to delete the destination.

Note❒ Pressing [Clear] deletes by single

digits the fax number or IP-Faxaddress entered using the num-ber keys. The destination speci-fied using destination keys orInternet Fax address can be en-tirely deleted at once by press-ing [Clear].

FFFF Press [Exit].

Note❒ To delete another destination,

repeat from step C.

GGGG Press [Exit].

The standby display appears.

JupterC2_Fax_EN-F_FM.book Page 20 Monday, November 29, 2004 3:48 PM

Page 31: b 7128511

Adding a Destination

21

2

Adding a Destination

Note❒ A destination cannot be added us-

ing a destination list.

AAAA Press [Change / Stop TX File].

BBBB Press [Check / Change Settings].

CCCC Select the file to which you wantto add a destination.

DDDD Press [Add].

Note❒ Press to switch the destina-

tion between fax number, Inter-net Fax address and IP-Faxaddress.

EEEE Specify the destination using thenumber keys or soft (on-screen)keys.

Note❒ To add e-mail address, press

[Manual Input], and then specifythe destination.

❒ You can also program a SUBCode or SEP Code by pressing[Adv. Features].

FFFF Press [Exit].

Note❒ Repeat steps C, if you want to

add another destination.

GGGG Press [Exit].

The standby display appears.

JupterC2_Fax_EN-F_FM.book Page 21 Monday, November 29, 2004 3:48 PM

Page 32: b 7128511

Checking and Canceling Transmission Files

22

2

Changing the Transmission Time

You can change the transmission timespecified with Send Later. See p.3“Sending at a Specific Time (SendLater)”.You can also delete the transmissiontime. If the transmission time is delet-ed, the file is transmitted immediate-ly.

AAAA Press [Change / Stop TX File].

BBBB Press [Check / Change Settings].

CCCC Select the file for which you wantto change or cancel the transmis-sion time.

DDDD The recipient appears.

EEEE Press [Change TX Time].

FFFF Press [Clear], and then re-enter thetransmission time using the num-ber keys or select [Economy Time],and then press [OK].

Note❒ If you select [Economy Time], the

economy time already specifiedis entered. See p.144 “GeneralSettings/Adjustment”.

❒ If you press [Transmit Now], thefile is transmitted immediately.However, if there is a file onstandby, that file is sent first.

GGGG Press [Exit].

Note❒ Repeat from step C, if you want

to change another transmissiontime.

HHHH Press [Exit].The standby display appears.

JupterC2_Fax_EN-F_FM.book Page 22 Monday, November 29, 2004 3:48 PM

Page 33: b 7128511

Printing a File

23

2

Printing a File

If you want to check the contents of afile that is stored in memory and notyet sent, use this procedure to print itout.

Note❒ Confidential Transmission files are

displayed, but cannot be printed.❒ You can also print files that have

not been successfully transmitted.

AAAA Press [Change / Stop TX File].

BBBB Press [Print File].

CCCC Select the file you want to print.

Note❒ If multiple destinations were

specified, only the number ofunsent messages appears.

❒ If you want two-sided printing,press [Print 2 Sided].

❒ To cancel printing, press [Can-cel]. The display returns to thatof step C.

DDDD Press the {{{{Start}}}} key.

Note❒ To cancel printing after pressing

the {{{{Start}}}} key, press [Stop Print-ing]. The display returns to thatof step C.

EEEE Press [Exit].

The standby display appears.

Note❒ Repeat from step C, if you want

to print another file.

FaxAdEN_Chapter-2 Page 23 Tuesday, December 28, 2004 6:44 PM

Page 34: b 7128511

Checking and Canceling Transmission Files

24

2

Resending a File

Machine memory stores messagesthat could not be successfully trans-mitted using Memory Transmission.Use this procedure to resend thesemessages.

PreparationYou should select “Store for 24hours” for “Store a message thatcould not be transmitted” in UserParameters. See p.166 “User Pa-rameters” (switch 24, bit 0).

Note❒ Files that could not be transmitted

will be kept for either 24 or 72hours depending on how you pro-gram this function. See p.166 “UserParameters” (switch 24, bit 1).

AAAA Press [Change / Stop TX File].

BBBB Press [Transmit Failed File].

CCCC Select the file you want to resend.

“TX failed” is displayed for filesthat could not be sent.

Note❒ If multiple destinations were

specified, only the destinationnumber appears.

❒ If multiple destinations werespecified, only the number ofunsent messages appears.

❒ To add a destination, press[Add], and then specify the des-tination.

DDDD Press [OK].

Note❒ To cancel transmissions, press

[Cancel]. The display returns tothat of step C.

❒ Repeat from step C to resendanother file.

EEEE Press [Exit].The standby display appears.Transmission starts.

JupterC2_Fax_EN-F_FM.book Page 24 Monday, November 29, 2004 3:48 PM

Page 35: b 7128511

Printing a List of Files in Memory (Print TX File List)

25

2

Printing a List of Files in Memory (Print TX File List)

Print this list if you want to find outwhich files are stored in memory andwhat their file numbers are. Knowingthe file number can be useful (for ex-ample when erasing files).

Note❒ The contents of a file stored in mem-

ory can also be printed. See p.23“Printing a File”.

❒ You can display a sender namewith the User Parameters. Seep.166 “User Parameters” (switch04, bit 5).

AAAA Press [Change / Stop TX File].

BBBB Press [Print List].

Note❒ To cancel printing before press-

ing the {{{{Start}}}} key, press [Can-cel]. The display returns to thatof step B.

CCCC Press the {{{{Start}}}} key.

Note❒ To cancel printing after pressing

the {{{{Start}}}} key, press [Stop Print-ing]. The display returns to thatof step B.

DDDD Press [Exit].The standby display appears.

JupterC2_Fax_EN-F_FM.book Page 25 Monday, November 29, 2004 3:48 PM

Page 36: b 7128511

Checking and Canceling Transmission Files

26

2

JupterC2_Fax_EN-F_FM.book Page 26 Monday, November 29, 2004 3:48 PM

Page 37: b 7128511

27

3. CommunicationInformation

Printing the Journal

The Journal contains informationabout the last 50 communications(maximum) made by your machine. Itis printed automatically after every 50communications (receptions & trans-missions).You can also print a copy of the Jour-nal at any time by following the pro-cedure below.If the machine is installed with theoptional extra G3 interface unit, youcan print the Journal of each line type.

Important❒ The contents of a Journal printed

automatically are deleted afterprinting. Keep the journal if yourequire a record of transmissionsand receptions. You can check a to-tal of 200 communications (recep-tions & transmissions) on thedisplay.

❖❖❖❖ AllPrints the results of communica-tions in the order made.

❖❖❖❖ Print per File No.Prints only the results of commu-nications specified by file number.

❖❖❖❖ Print per UserPrints the results of communica-tions by individual sender.

Note❒ The setting on the machine can be

changed so that user codes will beprinted instead of user names. Formore information, contact yourservice representative.

❒ The sender name column of theJournal is useful when you need toprogram a special sender. Seep.171 “Special Senders to TreatDifferently”.

❒ You can set whether the Journal isautomatically printed after every50 communications in User Param-eters. See p.166 “User Parameters”(switch 03, bit 7).

❒ You can display a sender namewith the User Parameters. Seep.166 “User Parameters” (switch04, bit 5).

❒ You can set whether you print theJournal by line type. See p.166 “Us-er Parameters” (switch 19, bit 1).

❒ You can program one of the QuickOperation keys with operations forthis function. Using the key allowsyou to omit steps A. See p.144“General Settings/Adjustment”.

❒ Depending on security settings,the destination may not appear.

AAAA Press [Information].

BBBB Press [Print Journal].

JupterC2_Fax_EN-F_FM.book Page 27 Monday, November 29, 2004 3:48 PM

Page 38: b 7128511

Communication Information

28

3

CCCC Select a printing mode.

All

A Select [All].

Print per File No.

A Select [Print per File No.].

B Enter a 4-digit file number.

Note❒ If you make a mistake, press

[Clear] or the {{{{Clear/Stop}}}} key,and then try again.

Printing per User

A Select [Print per User].

B Select a user.

Note❒ Press [Cancel] if the user is

not registered. The displayreturns to that of step B.

C Press [OK] after checking theuser name shown on the dis-play.

Note❒ Press [Clear] to return to the

previous screen if a wronguser name is selected.

DDDD Press the {{{{Start}}}} key.

Note❒ To cancel a file printing, press

[Stop Printing]. The display re-turns to that of step B.

EEEE Press [Exit] twice.

The standby display appears.

FaxAdEN_Chapter-3 Page 28 Wednesday, January 19, 2005 2:33 PM

Page 39: b 7128511

Printing the Journal

29

3

Journal

1. Printing dateShows the date and time when the reportis printed.

2. Programmed Fax HeaderShows the sender name programmed forprinting.

3. DateShows the transmission or receptiondate.

4. TimeShows the transmission or reception starttime.

5. Other end

❖❖❖❖ For fax destinations• Shows the name (for display) pro-

grammed by the other end.• Shows the programmed fax num-

ber if the name (for display) has notbeen programmed.

• If neither name nor fax number hasbeen programmed by the otherend, an entered fax number or aname programmed in a destinationlist is shown for transmissions.

• The space will be blank for recep-tions.

Note❒ To prioritize a fax number or name

programmed in the destinationlist, contact your service represen-tative.

ADJ102S

JupterC2_Fax_EN-F_FM.book Page 29 Monday, November 29, 2004 3:48 PM

Page 40: b 7128511

Communication Information

30

3

❖❖❖❖ For Internet Fax destinationsAt time of transmission, it shows thee-mail address or name programmedin the destination list. At time of re-ception, it shows the e-mail address ofthe sender.At time of broadcasting transmission,it shows the number of destinationsafter the e-mail addresses or names ofdestination.

Note❒ When documents are transmitted

from the computer to the machine,-- LAN-Fax --> appears. To check ifthe documents are sent to the re-ceiver, confirm the same File No.

❖❖❖❖ For IP-Fax destinationsShows the IP-Fax destination or nameprogrammed in the destination list.The Fax destination details appear onreception report.

❖❖❖❖ For Folder destinationsShows the name programmed in thedestination list for transmissions.

6. Communication mode• For fax transmissions and receptions

After “T” for outgoing fax or “R” foringoing fax, shows a communicationmode. If the optional Extra G3 inter-face unit has been installed, “G3-1”,“G3-2”, “G3-3”, or “G3 Auto” will beshown.

• For Internet Fax transmissions and re-ceptions After , and “T” for outgoing e-mailor “R” for ingoing e-mail, the commu-nication mode appears in alphabeticalletters or symbols. Outgoing e-mailset for Reception Notice of E-mail Op-tions bears a “Q”, whereas “A” ap-pears with reception confirmation e-mails.

• For IP-Fax transmissions and recep-tionsAfter , and “T” for outgoing fax or“R” for ingoing fax, the communica-tion mode appears in alphabetical let-ters or symbols.

• For Folder receptionsShows (folder mark).

7. Communication timeShows time taken for transmissions or re-ceptions.

8. Number of pagesShows the number of pages transmittedor received.

9. Communication resultShows the result of transmissions or re-ceptions.OK: All pages were properly transmittedor received. When Reception Notice is ac-tivated using the Internet Fax E-mail Op-tions, receipt of Reception Notice isshown.--: The Internet Fax was document sent tothe mail server programmed in this ma-chine. (However , this does not mean thee-mail was delivered.) When using LAN-Fax, communication results from thismachine to a computer.Error: A communication error occurred.D: Power was disconnected during com-munication. Not all fax messages weretransmitted.

10. User nameShows the sender's name.

11. File numberShows file management numbers.

FaxAdEN_Chapter-3 Page 30 Monday, December 20, 2004 11:19 AM

Page 41: b 7128511

Checking the Transmission Result (TX File Status)

31

3

Checking the Transmission Result (TX File Status)

You can browse a part of the Immedi-ate TX Result Report on the display.

Note❒ Only the transmission result of the

last 200 communications (recep-tions & transmissions) are shown.

❒ You can view sent fax messagesand their lists, using a networkcomputer Web Image Monitor. Fordetails, see the Web Image Moni-tor's Help.

❒ If a transmission is completedwhile you are using this function,the result will not appear. To viewthe latest result, exit TX File Status,and then try again.

❒ You can program one of the QuickOperation keys with operations forthis function. Using the key allowsyou to omit steps A. See p.144“General Settings/Adjustment”.

AAAA Press [Information].

BBBB Select [TX File Status].

CCCC Check the transmission results.

Transmission results are dis-played, from the latest resultdown, in groups of six.

Note❒ When a fax is sent, “Destina-

tion:” shows the Own Fax Num-ber or Fax Header informationof a receiver. The e-mail addressand name programmed in thedestination list appears in the“To” field of the sent InternetFax document. For a transmis-sion from a computer, “-- LAN-Fax -->” is shown.

❒ Depending on security settings,the destination may appear as *.

DDDD Press [Exit] twice.

The standby display appears.

Note❒ When documents are transmit-

ted from the computer to themachine, -- LAN-Fax --> ap-pears. To check if the docu-ments are sent to the receiver,confirm the same File No.

FaxAdEN_Chapter-3 Page 31 Monday, December 20, 2004 11:19 AM

Page 42: b 7128511

Communication Information

32

3

Checking the Reception Result (RX File Status)

You can browse a part of the Recep-tion Result Report on the display.

Note❒ Only the reception result of the last

200 communications (receptions &transmissions) are shown.

❒ You can view received fax messag-es and their lists, using a networkcomputer Web Image Monitor. Fordetails, see the Web Image Moni-tor's Help.

❒ If a message is received while youare using this function, the resultwill not appear. To view the latestresult, exit RX File Status, and thentry again.

❒ You can program one of the QuickOperation keys with operations forthis function. Using the key allowsyou to omit steps A. See p.144“General Settings/Adjustment”.

AAAA Press [Information].

BBBB Select [RX File Status].

CCCC Check the reception results.

Reception results are displayedfrom the latest result in groups ofsix.

Note❒ When a fax or IP-Fax is received,

Transmission Station shows thesender's fax number or FaxHeader information. The send-er's e-mail address appears inthe “From” field of the receivedInternet Fax.

DDDD Press [Exit] twice.

The standby display appears.

JupterC2_Fax_EN-F_FM.book Page 32 Monday, November 29, 2004 3:48 PM

Page 43: b 7128511

Displaying the Memory Status

33

3

Displaying the Memory Status

Use this function to display a summa-ry of current memory usage. Itemsshown are the percentage of freememory space, the number of re-ceived confidential messages, thenumber of files to be sent, the numberof Memory Lock files and the numberof received messages to be printed.

AAAA Press [Information].

BBBB Press [Memory Status].

CCCC Check the memory status.

Note❒ “Others” will be displayed:

• When storing attachment files.See p.65 “Sending an AutoDocument”.

• For storing Reception Re-quest files. See p.52 “TransferStation”.

• When storing originals in theInformation Boxes. See p.42“Storing Messages in Infor-mation Boxes”.

• When sending to the Person-al Box. See p.41 “PrintingPersonal Box Messages”.

❒ If you have made the machinesave received messages on thehard disk, see “RX Print Stand-by File” on the display to checkthe number.

DDDD Press [Exit] twice.

The standby display appears.

JupterC2_Fax_EN-F_FM.book Page 33 Monday, November 29, 2004 3:48 PM

Page 44: b 7128511

Communication Information

34

3

Printing/Deleting Received and Stored Documents (Print/Delete Stored RX File)

You can print documents that are re-ceived and stored on the hard disk.You can also delete unwanted docu-ments.

PreparationMake a setting for received andstored documents before using thisfunction. See p.193 “Storing orPrinting Received Documents”.

Note❒ If you have selected to store re-

ceived documents and specified ane-mail address for notification ofreceipt, fax reception notificationcan be sent to that e-mail address.See p.194 “Reception Report e-mail”.

❒ You can store up to 400 receiveddocuments on the hard disk.

❒ You can view, print received andstored documents using a Web Im-age Monitor or DeskTopBinder.See p.123 “Viewing Fax Informa-tion Using a Web Browser” or theDeskTopBinder's manuals andHelp.

Printing Received and Stored Documents

Use the following procedure to printdocuments saved on the hard disk.

Note❒ This function allows you to print

only received and stored docu-ments.

❒ You cannot print and delete re-ceived documents using the Docu-ment Server function.

❒ You can specify and print multipledocuments. You can specify a max-imum of 30 documents at one time.

AAAA Press [Information].

BBBB Press [Print / Delete Stored RX File].

CCCC Select a file to be printed, andthen press [Print].

JupterC2_Fax_EN-F_FM.book Page 34 Monday, November 29, 2004 3:48 PM

Page 45: b 7128511

Printing/Deleting Received and Stored Documents (Print/Delete Stored RX File)

35

3

DDDD Select the printing mode, and thenpress the {{{{Start}}}} key.

Note❒ To cancel printing, press [Can-

cel]. The display returns to thatof step C.

❒ To delete the document afterprinting, press [Delete File afterPrinting].

❒ To perform two-sided printing,press [Print on 2 Sides] beforepressing the {{{{Start}}}} key.

EEEE Press [Exit] twice.The standby display appears.

Deleting Received and Stored Documents

Use the following procedure to deletedocuments stored on the hard disk.

Note❒ You cannot delete a document while

another person is previewing orprinting it using a Web ImageMonitor or DeskTopBinder.

❒ You can specify and print multipledocuments. You can specify a max-imum of 30 documents at one time.

AAAA Press [Information].

BBBB Press [Print / Delete Stored RX File].

CCCC Select a file to be deleted, and thenpress [Delete].

DDDD Press [Yes].

Note❒ To cancel a deletion, press [No].

The display returns to that ofstep C.

EEEE Press [Exit] twice.The standby display appears.

JupterC2_Fax_EN-F_FM.book Page 35 Monday, November 29, 2004 3:48 PM

Page 46: b 7128511

Communication Information

36

3

Printing a Confidential Message

This function is designed to preventunauthorized users from readingyour messages. If someone sends youa message using Confidential Trans-mission, it is stored in memory butnot automatically printed. To printthe message you have to enter theConfidential ID Code. When yourmachine has received a confidentialmessage, the Confidential File (i)indicator lights.

PreparationBefore using this function, pro-gram your Confidential ID. Seep.191 “Programming a Confiden-tial ID”.

Important❒ If the main power switch is off

more than one hour, all confiden-tial messages are deleted. Whenthis happens, use the Power Fail-ure Report to identify which mes-sages have been deleted. See p.198“Turning Off the Main Power /When a Power Failure Occurs”.

Limitation❒ You must program the Confiden-

tial ID for Confidential Receptionto work.

❒ This function is not available withInternet Fax.

Note❒ You can program one of the Quick

Operation keys with operations forthis function. Using the key allowsyou to omit steps B. See p.144“General Settings/Adjustment”.

AAAA Confirm that the Confidential Fileindicator is lit.

BBBB Press [Information].

CCCC Press [Print Confidential RX File].

Note❒ If no confidential messages have

been received, the message “Noreception file.” is shown.Press [Exit].

DDDD Enter a 4-digit Confidential IDusing the number keys, and thenpress the {{{{Start}}}} key.

The Confidential ID differs de-pending on the Sender's specifica-tions.

JupterC2_Fax_EN-F_FM.book Page 36 Monday, November 29, 2004 3:48 PM

Page 47: b 7128511

Printing a Confidential Message

37

3

Note❒ You must enter the Confidential

ID programmed in this ma-chine, if the received file has noConfidential ID.

❒ You must enter the ConfidentialID programmed by the sender.Confirm the sender's Confiden-tial ID in advance.

❒ If the Confidential IDs or Per-sonal Confidential IDs do notmatch, the message “No recep-tion file under specifiedConfidential ID.” appears.Press [Exit] to cancel the opera-tion, and then check the Confi-d e n t i a l ID o r P e r s o n a lConfidential ID with the otherparty, and then try again.

EEEE Press [Exit].

The standby display appears.

----If you cannot print confidential files even if the Confidential File (iiii) indicator is lit.

The Confidential File indicator alsolights if the machine received a mes-sage with a SUB Code. Check the Per-sonal Boxes.

Note❒ Print from the Personal Box, when

a file has been sent from anotherparty with a SUB Code attached.See p.41 “Printing Personal BoxMessages”.

Confidential File Report

When this function is turned on, thisreport is printed whenever your ma-chine receives a confidential message.

Note❒ You can turn this function on or off

with the User Parameters. Seep.166 “User Parameters” (switch04, bit 0).

❒ You can display a destination withthe User Parameters. See p.166“User Parameters” (switch 04, bit4).

JupterC2_Fax_EN-F_FM.book Page 37 Monday, November 29, 2004 3:48 PM

Page 48: b 7128511

Communication Information

38

3

Printing a File Received with Memory Lock

This is a security function designed toprevent unauthorized users fromreading your messages. If MemoryLock is switched on, all received mes-sages are stored in memory and arenot automatically printed. To printthe messages, you have to enter theMemory Lock ID Code. When yourmachine has received a message withMemory Lock, the Confidential File(i) indicator blinks.

PreparationBefore using this function, pro-gram your Memory Lock ID. Seep.192 “Programming a MemoryLock ID”.Before using this function, setMemory Lock to On. See p.174“Memory Lock”.

Important❒ If the main power switch is turned

off for more than an hour, all mes-sages protected by Memory Lockwill be deleted. In that case, thePower Failure Report will be print-ed so you can confirm which mes-sages have been deleted. See p.198“Turning Off the Main Power /When a Power Failure Occurs”.

Note❒ If Memory Lock and received doc-

ument storage are both set to on,Memory Lock is unavailable andrece ived documents becomestored documents. For details, seep.193 “Storing or Printing Re-ceived Documents” and p.34“Printing/Deleting Received andStored Documents (Print/DeleteStored RX File)”.

❒ Even when Memory Lock is avail-able, if free memory is insufficient,reception is not possible.

❒ You can also apply a Memory Lockto messages that come only fromcertain senders. See p.174 “Pro-gramming/Changing SpecialSenders”.

❒ Messages received by Polling Re-ception are automatically printedeven if this function is switched on.

❒ You can program one of the QuickOperation keys with operations forthis function. Using the key allowsyou to omit steps B. See p.144“General Settings/Adjustment”.

AAAA Confirm that the Confidential Fileindicator is blinking.

BBBB Press [Information].

CCCC Press [Print Memory Lock].

Note❒ If no messages were received

w h i le M e m o r y L o c k w a sswitched on, the message “Noreception file.” is shown.Press [Exit] .

JupterC2_Fax_EN-F_FM.book Page 38 Monday, November 29, 2004 3:48 PM

Page 49: b 7128511

Printing a File Received with Memory Lock

39

3

DDDD Enter a 4-digit Memory Lock IDwith the number keys, and thenpress the {{{{Start}}}} key.

Note❒ If the Memory Lock ID does not

match, the message “Speci-fied code does not corre-spond to programmed MemoryLock ID.” appears. Press [Exit]and retry after checking theMemory Lock ID.

EEEE Press [Exit].

The standby display appears.

JupterC2_Fax_EN-F_FM.book Page 39 Monday, November 29, 2004 3:48 PM

Page 50: b 7128511

Communication Information

40

3

Personal Boxes

PreparationBefore using this function, set thePersonal Box in advance. See p.181“Programming/changing Person-al Boxes”.

Personal Boxes

This function lets you set up the machineso that incoming messages addressed tocertain users are stored in memory in-stead of being printed out immediately. Each user must be assigned a SUBCode (Personal Code) that has beendesignated as a Personal Box before-hand. When the other party sends theirmessage, they specify the SUB Code ofthe receiver. When the message is re-ceived, it is stored in the Personal Boxwith the matching SUB Code. In orderto print a received message. This enables several individuals ordepartments to share a single fax ma-chine yet be able to differentiate be-tween messages. Furthermore, if youspecify a receiver for the Personal Box,instead of being stored in memory, in-coming messages with this SUB Codeappended are forwarded directly tothe destination you specify. You canspecify a fax number, e-mail addressor IP-Fax destination as the receiver.See p.181 “Programming/changingPersonal Boxes” for details on pro-gramming receivers.

• To be able to receive messages intoa Personal Box you must informthe sender of the SUB Code pro-grammed for that Personal Boxand ask them to send the messageusing SUB Code Transmissionwith that SUB Code. See p.49 “SUBCode”.

• When messages have been re-ceived into Personal Boxes, theConfidential Reception/MemoryLock indicator lights and the Con-fidential File Report is printed. Seep.37 “Confidential File Report”.

• If a receiver is assigned, the deliv-ered document is deleted.

• If a receiver is not assigned, printthese messages. See p.41 “PrintingPersonal Box Messages”.

❖❖❖❖ SUB Code and SEP Code SUB Code and SEP Code are IDsconsisting of up to 20 digits, andcan include numbers, #, *, andspaces. To use this function, youmust program a box and SUB/SEPCode beforehand. The other partycan send messages to, and retrievestored messages from, this box us-ing the code.

Note❒ This function is not available when

you have set received documentsto be delivered to the network de-livery server.

JupterC2_Fax_EN-F_FM.book Page 40 Monday, November 29, 2004 3:48 PM

Page 51: b 7128511

Personal Boxes

41

3

Printing Personal Box Messages

Follow these steps to print a messagethat has been received into a PersonalBox.

Note❒ If you print a Personal Box mes-

sage, it is deleted.

AAAA Make sure that the ConfidentialFile indicator is lit.

BBBB Press [Information].

CCCC Press [Print Personal Box File].

DDDD Select the box with the messageyou want to print.

When a password is required

The display appears, when the se-lected Personal Box password isset in advance.

Note❒ The password is programmed

in “Administrator Tools”. Seep.181 “Programming/chang-ing Personal Boxes”.

A Enter the password, and thenpress [OK].

Note❒ If you make a mistake, press

[Clear] or the {{{{Clear/Stop}}}} keybefore pressing [OK], andthen try again.

❒ To cancel entering a password,press [Cancel]. The displayreturns to that of step D.

EEEE Press the {{{{Start}}}} key.

Note❒ To stop printing, press [Stop

Printing]. The display returns tothat of step D.

FFFF Press [Exit].

Note❒ To print a message in another

Personal Box, refer to step D,and then try again.

GGGG Press [Exit].

The standby display appears.

JupterC2_Fax_EN-F_FM.book Page 41 Monday, November 29, 2004 3:48 PM

Page 52: b 7128511

Communication Information

42

3

Information Boxes

PreparationBefore using this function, set theInformation Box in advance. Seep.184 “Programming/changingInformation Boxes”.

Information Boxes

Use the Information Box function toset up the machine as DocumentServer. By scanning documents intoInformation Boxes, other parties canreceive these messages wheneverthey request them.

• You can program documents forthis function with “Store / Delete/ Print Information Box File”. Seep.42 “Storing Messages in Infor-mation Boxes” .

• For other parties to be able to re-trieve a message programmed inan Information Box, you need toinform them of the SEP Code as-signed to that Information Box.

• When an SEP Code Polling Recep-tion request is made by anotherparty, the SEP Code they specify ismatched against the SEP Codesprogrammed in that InformationBoxes. If a code matches, the mes-sage stored in the Information Boxis sent to the other party automati-cally. See p.50 “SEP Code”.

• You can check the contents of In-formation Boxes with “Store / De-lete / Print Information Box File”.See p.44 “Printing Information BoxMessages”.

• You can set a password for Infor-mation Boxes in advance. A pass-word can be set in “AdministratorSetting”. See p.184 “Program-ming/changing Information Box-es”.

Storing Messages in Information Boxes

Follow these steps to store a messagein an Information Box.

Note❒ One Information Box stores one file.❒ The stored file is not deleted auto-

matically. If you want to delete astored file, see p.45 “Deleting In-formation Box Messages”.

AAAA Press [Information].

BBBB Press [Store / Delete / Print InformationBox File].

JupterC2_Fax_EN-F_FM.book Page 42 Monday, November 29, 2004 3:48 PM

Page 53: b 7128511

Information Boxes

43

3

CCCC Select the box in which you wantto store the file.

Note❒ When there are pre-programmed

files, a file mark is displayed atthe end of the Box Name.

❒ A message is displayed, whenselecting a box with a file storedin it. Press [Yes], when changingthe file name. The file storedoriginally will be overwritten.

When a password is required

A Enter the password, and thenpress [OK].

Note❒ If you make a mistake, press

[Clear] or the {{{{Clear/Stop}}}} keybefore pressing [OK], andthen try again.

❒ To cancel entering a pass-word, press [Cancel]. The dis-play returns to that of step C.

DDDD Place the original, and then selectthe scan settings you require.

Note❒ You can also select the follow-

ing settings:• Book Fax• 2 Sided Original (The option-

al ADF is required.)• Stamp (The optional ADF is

required.)

Referencep.13 “Placing Originals”, Fac-simile Reference <Basic Features>p.30 “Scan Settings”, FacsimileReference <Basic Features>

EEEE Press the {{{{Start}}}} key.

The machine starts to scan the orig-inal.To stop scanning, press [Stop Scan-ning]. The display returns to that ofstep C.

FFFF Press [Exit].

Note❒ To store a message in another

Information Box, return to stepC.

GGGG Press [Exit].

The standby display appears.

JupterC2_Fax_EN-F_FM.book Page 43 Monday, November 29, 2004 3:48 PM

Page 54: b 7128511

Communication Information

44

3

Printing Information Box Messages

Follow these steps to print a messagestored in an Information Box.

AAAA Press [Information].

BBBB Press [Store / Delete / Print InformationBox File].

CCCC Press [Print File].

DDDD Select the box that contains thestored file you want to print.

Note❒ You cannot select a box that has

no stored file.

When a password is required

A Enter the password, and thenpress [OK].

Note❒ If you make a mistake, press

[Clear] or the {{{{Clear/Stop}}}} keybefore pressing [OK], andthen try again.

❒ To cancel entering a pass-word, press [Cancel]. The dis-play returns to that of step D.

EEEE Press the {{{{Start}}}} key.

Note❒ If you want two-sided printing,

press [Print 2 Sided] before press-ing the {{{{Start}}}} key.

❒ To stop printing before pressingthe {{{{Start}}}} key, press [Cancel].The display returns to that ofstep D.

❒ To stop printing after pressingthe {{{{Start}}}} key, press [Stop Print-ing]. The display returns to thatof step D.

FFFF Press [Exit].

Note❒ Repeat from step D to print an-

other stored file in the box.

GGGG Press [Exit].

The standby display appears.

JupterC2_Fax_EN-F_FM.book Page 44 Monday, November 29, 2004 3:48 PM

Page 55: b 7128511

Information Boxes

45

3

Deleting Information Box Messages

Follow these steps to delete a filestored in an Information Box.

AAAA Press [Information].

BBBB Press [Store / Delete / Print InformationBox File].

CCCC Press [Delete File].

DDDD Select the box that contains thestored file you want to delete.

When a password is required

A Enter the password, and thenpress [OK].

Note❒ If you make a mistake, press

[Clear] or the {{{{Clear/Stop}}}} keybefore pressing [OK], andthen try again.

❒ To cancel entering a pass-word, press [Cancel]. The dis-play returns to that of step D.

EEEE Press [Delete].

Note❒ To stop deleting, press [Do not

Delete]. The display returns tothat of step D.

FFFF Press [Exit].

Note❒ Repeat from step D to delete an-

other stored file in another box.

GGGG Press [Exit].

The standby display appears.

JupterC2_Fax_EN-F_FM.book Page 45 Monday, November 29, 2004 3:48 PM

Page 56: b 7128511

Communication Information

46

3

JupterC2_Fax_EN-F_FM.book Page 46 Monday, November 29, 2004 3:48 PM

Page 57: b 7128511

47

4. Other Transmission Features

Handy Dialing Functions

Chain Dial

This allows you to compose a tele-phone number from various parts,some of which may be stored inQuick Dials and some of which maybe entered using the number keys.

Limitation❒ You cannot use this function with

Internet Fax transmission.

Note❒ The total number of digits that can

be entered is up to 128 using desti-nation keys and number keys.

❒ For Memory Transmission and Im-mediate Transmission, insert apause between parts of a number.For On Hook Dial and Manual Di-al, no pause is needed.

❒ The Advanced Features functionprogrammed in the destination listis unavailable.

(Example) 01133-1-555333

Assume that 01133 is stored in aQuick Dial key.

AAAA Place the original, and then selectthe scan settings you require.

BBBB Press the Quick Dial key that isprogrammed “01133”.

CCCC Press the {{{{Pause/Redial}}}} key.

DDDD Enter {{{{1}}}}, {{{{5}}}}, {{{{5}}}}, {{{{5}}}}, {{{{3}}}}, {{{{3}}}},{{{{3}}}} using the number keys.

EEEE Press the {{{{Start}}}} key.

Redial

The machine stores the last 10 desti-nations specified in each transmissionmethod. This function saves timewhen you are sending to the samedestination repeatedly, as you do nothave to enter the destination again.

Limitation❒ The following kinds of destinations

are not stored:• Quick Dials• Group Dials• Destinations dialed as Receiv-

ing Stations for Transfer Re-quest

• Forwarding terminal of the Sub-stitute Reception

• Destinations dialed using theexternal telephone

• Destinations dialed by Redial(regarded as already stored inmemory)

• Second and later destinationsbroadcasted to

❒ To redial a fax number, do not dialany numbers before you press the{{{{Pause/Redial}}}} key. If you press the{{{{Pause/Redial}}}} key after enteringnumbers using the number keys, apause will be entered instead.

Note❒ You can specify the Internet Fax

destination and IP-Fax using withthe Redial function. Select to usethis function before pressing [Man-ual Input].

FaxAdEN_Chapter-4 Page 47 Monday, December 20, 2004 11:20 AM

Page 58: b 7128511

Other Transmission Features

48

4

AAAA Place the original, and then selectthe scan settings you require.

BBBB Press the {{{{Pause/Redial}}}} key.

CCCC Select the destination you want toredial to.

Note❒ Now that the date and time the

original was read appears as akey, select by pressing it.

❒ When you press [ProgDest], youcan register a selected recipientin the destination list. See p.39“Registering Entered Destina-tions to the Address Book”, Fac-simile Reference <Basic Features>.

JupterC2_Fax_EN-F_FM.book Page 48 Monday, November 29, 2004 3:48 PM

Page 59: b 7128511

Advanced Features

49

4

Advanced Features

SUB Code

Normally you can only use Confiden-tial Transmission to send messages tofax machines of the same manufactur-er that have the Confidential Recep-tion function. See p.9 “ConfidentialTransmission”. However, if the othermachine supports a similar functioncalled “SUB Code”, you can send faxmessages to the other party using thismethod instead.

Limitation❒ A SUB Code cannot be used with

Internet Fax.

Note❒ The ID can be up to 20 digits long.❒ You can enter numbers, *, #, and

spaces to program an ID. ❒ Make sure the number of digits in

the ID matches the specification ofthe machine to which you aresending.

❒ You can store IDs in destinationlists and Programs. See “Fax Desti-nation”, General Settings Guide. Seep.129 “Registering and ChangingKeystroke Programs”.

❒ Messages you send using thisfunction are marked “SUB” on allreports.

❒ This function is not available withInternet Fax.

AAAA Place the original, and then selectthe scan settings you require.

Referencep.13 “Placing Originals”, Fac-simile Reference <Basic Features>p.30 “Scan Settings”, FacsimileReference <Basic Features>

BBBB Enter the fax number of a destina-tion or an IP-Fax destination.

CCCC Press [Adv. Features].

DDDD Press [SUB Code].

EEEE Press [TX SUB Code].

FFFF Enter a SUB Code, and then press[OK].

“SUB Code” appears one lineabove [Adv. Features] on the dis-play.

Note❒ If you make a mistake, press

[Cancel] or the {{{{Clear/Stop}}}} keybefore pressing [OK], and thentry again.

GGGG To enter a password, press [Pass-word (SID)].

HHHH Enter the password with the num-ber keys, and then press [OK].

IIII Press [Exit].

JJJJ Press the {{{{Start}}}} key.

JupterC2_Fax_EN-F_FM.book Page 49 Monday, November 29, 2004 3:48 PM

Page 60: b 7128511

Other Transmission Features

50

4

Note❒ If you use Immediate Transmis-

sion and the fax machine at thedestination does not supportthe SUB Code function, a mes-sage will appear on the displayto inform you of this. When thishappens, press [OK] to cancelthe transmission.

SID Code

There are times when you may wantto use an “SID” (Sender ID) whensending confidential faxes with theSUB Code function.

Note❒ The ID can be up to 20 digits long.❒ You can enter numbers, *, #, and

spaces to program an ID.❒ You can store IDs in destination

lists and Programs. See p.129“Registering and Changing Key-stroke Programs”. See “Fax Desti-nation”, General Settings Guide.

❒ Messages you send using thisfunction are marked “SID” on allreports.

SEP Code

Normally you can only use PollingReception to receive faxes from ma-chines that have the Polling Receptionfunction and the same manufacturer.However, if a machine of anothermanufacturer supports Polling Re-ception, you can receive fax messagesfrom the other party using this meth-od instead. You can receive messages that havethe same SEP Code as the SEP Codeyou entered.

Limitation❒ A SEP Code cannot be used with

Internet Fax.

Note❒ The ID can be up to 20 digits long.❒ Make sure the number of digits in

the ID matches the one set on themachine to which you are sending.

❒ You can enter numbers, *, #, andspaces to program an ID.

❒ You can store IDs in destinationlists and Programs. See “Fax Desti-nation”, General Settings Guide. Seep.129 “Registering and ChangingKeystroke Programs”.

❒ Messages you receive using thisfunction are marked “SEP” on allreports.

❒ This function is not available withInternet Fax.

AAAA Enter the fax number of a destina-tion or an IP-Fax destination.

BBBB Press [Adv. Features].

CCCC Press [SEP Code].

DDDD Press [RX SEP Code].

FaxAdEN_Chapter-4 Page 50 Wednesday, January 19, 2005 2:33 PM

Page 61: b 7128511

Advanced Features

51

4

EEEE Enter a SEP Code, and then press[OK].

“SEP Code” appears one lineabove [Adv. Features] on the dis-play.

Note❒ If you make a mistake, press

[Cancel] or the {{{{Clear/Stop}}}} keybefore pressing [OK], and thentry again.

FFFF To enter a password, press [Pass-word (PWD)].

GGGG Enter the password using thenumber keys, and then press [OK].

HHHH Press [Exit].

IIII Press [Transmission Mode].

JJJJ Press [Polling RX].

KKKK Press [Default ID / Free Polling RX],and then press [OK].

Note❒ To cancel Polling RX, press [Can-

cel]. The display returns to thatof step J.

LLLL Press [OK].

The standby display appears.

MMMM Press the {{{{Start}}}} key.

PWD Code

There are times you may want to usea password when receiving faxes bypolling using the SEP Code function.

Note❒ The password can be up to 20 dig-

its long.❒ You can enter numbers, *, #, and

spaces as a password.❒ You can store IDs in destination

lists and Programs. See “Fax Desti-nation”, General Settings Guide. Seep.129 “Registering and ChangingKeystroke Programs”.

❒ Messages you send using this func-tion are marked “PWD” on all re-ports.

JupterC2_Fax_EN-F_FM.book Page 51 Monday, November 29, 2004 3:48 PM

Page 62: b 7128511

Other Transmission Features

52

4

Transfer Request

Transfer Request allows fax machinesthat have this function to automati-cally transfer incoming messages tomultiple fax destinations. This func-tion helps you save costs when yousend the same message to more thanone place in a distant area, and savestime since many messages can be sentin a single operation.The diagram below may make theconcept clearer.

The following terminologies are usedin this section:

❖❖❖❖ Requesting PartyThe machine where the messageoriginates.

❖❖❖❖ Transfer StationThe machine that forwards the in-coming message to another desti-nation.

❖❖❖❖ Receiving StationThe facsimile or computer that re-ceived the message from theTransfer Station.

PreparationBefore you can use this function,you must make the followingpreparations:

• Program each Transfer Stationnumber in this machine (Re-questing Party) and in theTransfer Station itself. See p.190“Transfer Report”.

• Program the same Polling ID inboth this machine (RequestingParty) and the Transfer Station.See p.192 “Programming a Poll-ing ID”.

• To send a Transfer Request byfax, the Transfer Station must bea fax machine of the same man-ufacturer and have the TransferStation function.

• To send a Transfer Request by e-mail, Transfer Station must be afax machine of the same manu-facturer that supports InternetFax.

• To send a Transfer Request byIP-Fax, the Transfer Stationmust be a fax machine that sup-ports IP-Fax and made by thesame manufacturer.

• You cannot use Transfer Re-quest without programming thefax number of the RequestingParty in a Quick Dial or SpeedDial.

• The Receiving Station's fax num-ber must be programmed in theTransfer Station's Quick Dial,Speed Dial or Group Dial.

Note❒ You can specify up to 500 Transfer

Stations in a Transfer Request.❒ You can have up to 30 End Receiv-

ers per Transfer Station. If youspecify a Transfer Station's Group,the Group counts as a single re-ceiver.

GFTRRQ1E

JupterC2_Fax_EN-F_FM.book Page 52 Monday, November 29, 2004 3:48 PM

Page 63: b 7128511

Advanced Features

53

4

❒ When a Transfer Request is sent bye-mail, as soon as the Transfer Sta-tion completes transfer to all Re-ceiving Stations, it sends back aTransfer Result Report by e-mail.See p.89 “Transfer Result Report(transfer request by e-mail)”.

❒ When a Transfer Request is sent bye-mail to a computer or facsimilewithout the Transfer Request func-tion, that machine receives it as or-dinary e-mail. It does not transferthe message nor send an error re-port back to the Requesting Party.To send Transfer Request by e-mail, use a Transfer Station thatsupports Internet Fax and has theTransfer Station function.

❒ You can program one of the QuickOperation keys with operations forthis function. Using the key allowsyou to omit steps C. See p.144“General Settings/Adjustment”.

AAAA Place the original, and then selectany scan settings you require.

Note❒ When using a Transfer Request

by e-mail, documents are sent at“Detail” resolution, even if youhave specified “Fine”. To send adocument at “Super Fine” or“Fine”, configure the Full Modewhen registering the destina-tions in the Address Book. Seep.55 “T.37 Full Mode”, FacsimileReference <Basic Features>.

❒ When using a Transfer Requestby e-mail, documents are sent atA4 width. Documents largerthan A4 are reduced to A4width. If the receiver is in com-pliance with the T.37 full mode,documents are sent at the widthspecified in the Address Book.See p.55 “T.37 Full Mode”, Fac-simile Reference <Basic Features>.

Referencep.13 “Placing Originals”, Fac-simile Reference <Basic Features>

p.30 “Scan Settings”, FacsimileReference <Basic Features>

BBBB Specify a Transfer Station.

Note❒ Enter directly or use a destina-

tion list to specify the fax num-ber, e-mail address, or IP-Faxdestination of the Transfer Sta-tion.

❒ If you make a mistake, press the{{{{Clear/Stop}}}} key, and then tryagain.

❒ When a Transfer Request is sentby e-mail, e-mail options can beset. See steps B and C on p.57“Sending Internet Fax Docu-ments”, Facsimile Reference <Ba-sic Features>.

Referencep.35 “Entering a Fax Number”,Facsimile Reference <Basic Fea-tures>p.36 “Entering an E-mail Ad-dress”, Facsimile Reference <BasicFeatures>

p.37 “Entering an IP-Fax Desti-nation”, Facsimile Reference <Ba-sic Features>

p.40 “Using Destination Lists”,Facsimile Reference <Basic Fea-tures>

CCCC Press [Adv. Features].

JupterC2_Fax_EN-F_FM.book Page 53 Monday, November 29, 2004 3:48 PM

Page 64: b 7128511

Other Transmission Features

54

4

DDDD Select [Transfer Req.].

EEEE Press [Receiving Station].

FFFF Specify a Receiving Station.

Note❒ You cannot enter Receiving Sta-

tion numbers directly. Thenumbers must be stored in des-tination lists, Speed Dial, orGroups in the Transfer Sta-tion(s). To specify a ReceivingStation, use the procedure de-scribed below.

❒ To cancel the Transfer Request,press [Cancel]. The display re-turns to that of step E.

Destination List

A Select [qqqq Quick Dial].

B Enter the registration numberof the destination list wherethe Receiving Station is stored.

For example, to select the regis-tration number stored in QuickDial 01 of the Transfer Station,enter: {{{{0}}}} {{{{1}}}}.

Note❒ You can enter up to five dig-

its.

Speed Dial

A Select [qqqqpppp Speed Dial].B Enter the number of the Speed

Dial code.

For example, to select the num-ber stored in Speed Dial 12 ofthe Transfer Station, enter: {{{{1}}}}{{{{2}}}}.

Group Dial

A Select [qqqqpppppppp Group Dial].

B Enter the number of the Groupnumber.

For example, to select the num-ber stored in Group Dial 04 ofthe Transfer Station, enter: {{{{0}}}}{{{{4}}}}.

GGGG To specify another Receiving Sta-tion, press [Add].

Note❒ Press [UUUU Prev.] or [TTTT Next] to see

the Receiving Stations alreadyentered. You can select a Re-ceiving Station from this list andremove it by pressing [Clear] orthe {{{{Clear/Stop}}}} key.

HHHH When you have specified all theReceiving Stations, press [OK].

IIII Press [Exit].

The Transfer Stations and Receiv-ing Stations are displayed.

JJJJ Press the {{{{Start}}}} key.

JupterC2_Fax_EN-F_FM.book Page 54 Monday, November 29, 2004 3:48 PM

Page 65: b 7128511

Advanced Features

55

4

With transfer requests set in the system settings

You can program a Quick Dial keywith Transfer Station and/or Receiv-ing Station using the Transfer Re-quest function in the System Settings.See “Registering the Transfer Re-quest”, General Settings Guide.

AAAA Place the original down, and thenselect the desired settings.

Referencep.13 “Placing Originals”, Fac-simile Reference <Basic Features>

p.30 “Scan Settings”, FacsimileReference <Basic Features>

BBBB Press the key programmed withTransfer Request.

CCCC Press the {{{{Start}}}} key.

----Setting Multistep TransferProgram a Transfer Station in a desti-nation list. When receiving a TransferRequest that specifies the same Re-ceiving Station as programmed in thedestination list, this machine sends aTransfer Request to the programmedTransfer Station. This function allowsfax messages to be transferred viamultiple stations and makes fax mes-sage transfer more efficient.You can program up to 30 ReceivingStations per Transfer Station. Formore information, contact your ser-vice representative.

JupterC2_Fax_EN-F_FM.book Page 55 Monday, November 29, 2004 3:48 PM

Page 66: b 7128511

Other Transmission Features

56

4

On Hook Dial

The On Hook Dial function allowsyou to dial while hearing tone fromthe internal speaker. You can send afax checking the connection.

Limitation❒ This function is not available for

the optional extra G3 interfaceunit, Internet Fax and IP-Fax.

Note❒ This function is unavailable in some

countries.❒ If an Immediate TX Result Report

(Immediate Transmission) is print-ed, On Hook Dial transmission re-sults are not mentioned on thereport.

AAAA Place the original, and then selectthe scan settings you require.

Referencep.13 “Placing Originals”, Fac-simile Reference <Basic Features>p.30 “Scan Settings”, FacsimileReference <Basic Features>

BBBB Press the {{{{On Hook Dial}}}} key.

You will hear a low tone from theinternal speaker.

Note❒ If you want to cancel this oper-

ation, press the {{{{On Hook Dial}}}}key again.

CCCC Dial.

The machine immediately dials thedestination.

Note❒ You can adjust the volume of

the On-hook sound by pressing[Higher] or [Lower] in the upperright-hand corner of the dis-play. The volume can also bepreprogrammed in “GeneralSettings and Adjustments”. Seep.83 “Adjusting the Volume”,Facsimile Reference <Basic Fea-tures> and p.144 “General Set-tings/Adjustment”.

❒ If you make a mistake, press the{{{{On Hook Dial}}}} or {{{{Clear Modes}}}}key, and then return to step B.

DDDD When the line is connected andyou hear a high-pitched tone,press the {{{{Start}}}} key.

The transmission starts.

Note❒ After transmission, the machine

returns to standby mode. ❒ If you want to cancel a transmis-

sion, press the {{{{Clear/Stop}}}} key,and then remove the originals.

JupterC2_Fax_EN-F_FM.book Page 56 Monday, November 29, 2004 3:48 PM

Page 67: b 7128511

On Hook Dial

57

4

----External Telephone On Hook Dial

If you have an external telephone onthe fax machine, you can speak withthe other party when you hear avoice. If you hear a voice before press-ing the {{{{Start}}}} key, pick up the exter-nal telephone and tell the receiveryou want to send a fax message (askthem to switch to facsimile mode).

JupterC2_Fax_EN-F_FM.book Page 57 Monday, November 29, 2004 3:48 PM

Page 68: b 7128511

Other Transmission Features

58

4

Manual Dial

The optional handset or an external telephone is required.

Pick up the optional handset or thehandset of the external telephone anddial. When the line is connected andyou hear a high-pitched tone, pressthe {{{{Start}}}} key to send your fax mes-sage. If, on the other hand, you hear avoice at the other end, continue con-versation as normal.

Limitation❒ This function is not available for

the optional extra G3 interfaceunit, Internet Fax and IP-Fax.

❒ If Immediate TX Result Report(Immediate Transmission) is print-ed, the result of a transmissionwith Manual Dial is not mentionedin the report.

AAAA Place the original, and then selectthe scan settings you require.

Referencep.13 “Placing Originals”, Fac-simile Reference <Basic Features>

p.30 “Scan Settings”, FacsimileReference <Basic Features>

BBBB Pick up the handset.

You will hear a tone.

CCCC Dial.

The machine immediately dials thedestination.

Note❒ If you make a mistake, replace

the external telephone, and thentry again from step B.

DDDD When the line is connected andyou hear a high-pitched tone,press the {{{{Start}}}} key to send yourfax message.The transmission starts.

Note❒ If you hear a voice, tell the re-

ceiver that you want to sendthem a fax message (ask them toswitch to facsimile mode).

EEEE Replace the handset.After transmission, the standbydisplay appears.

Note❒ If you want to cancel a transmis-

sion, press the {{{{Clear/Stop}}}} key,and then remove the originals.

JupterC2_Fax_EN-F_FM.book Page 58 Monday, November 29, 2004 3:48 PM

Page 69: b 7128511

Changing the Line Port

59

4

Changing the Line Port

The optional extra G3 interface unit is required.

When the extra G3 interface unit is in-stalled, you can connect to a maxi-mum of three ports.

Note❒ When you install the extra G3 in-

terface unit, you can specify theline port home position from“General Settings and Adjust-ment”. See p.144 “General Set-tings/Adjustment”.

❒ When sending a fax, you can selectthe line port if dialing with thenumber keys or Chain Dial.

❖❖❖❖ G3G3 is selected after power up orwhen the machine is reset. If youinstall the extra G3 interface unit,you can select “G3-1”, “G3-2”,“G3-3”, or “G3 Auto”dependingon the number of the installed unit.

❖❖❖❖ Multi-portWhen the extra G3 interface unit isinstalled, communications cantake place simultaneously throughthree lines at once.The following list shows protocolcombinations available for eachline type.

Note❒ A maximum of three simulta-

neous communications are pos-sible. You cannot perform threeImmediate Transmissions si-multaneously.

❒ If three communications are inprogress, the display shows thefirst communication that wasinitiated

AAAA Press [Select Line].

Option Available line types

Available pro-tocol combi-nations

Without option

PSTN G3

Extra G3 interface unit

PSTN+PSTN

G3+G3

Extra G3 interface unit + Ex-tra G3 in-terface unit

PSTN + PSTN + PSTN

G3 + G3 + G3

JupterC2_Fax_EN-F_FM.book Page 59 Monday, November 29, 2004 3:48 PM

Page 70: b 7128511

Other Transmission Features

60

4

BBBB Select the line you want to use.

When one optional extra G3 unit isinstalled.

Note❒ If you select “G3 Auto”, the ma-

chine will use any available line.This increases efficiency.

CCCC Press [Exit].

The standby display appears.

JupterC2_Fax_EN-F_FM.book Page 60 Monday, November 29, 2004 3:48 PM

Page 71: b 7128511

Sub Transmission Mode

61

4

Sub Transmission Mode

Book Fax

Use to send book originals from theexposure glass. Pages are scanned inthe order shown below.

Limitation❒ Place the original on the exposure

glass. You cannot use the optionalADF.

❒ Depending on paper sizes avail-able in the destination machine,the message may be reduced whenprinted at the other end.

Note❒ You can have bound originals

scanned as left or right page first.You can set which page (left orright) the machine scans first as de-fault with the User Parameters. Seep.166 “User Parameters” (switch06, bit 6).

❒ When using the Internet Fax func-tion, documents are sent at A4width. Documents larger than A4are reduced to A4 width. See p.13“Placing Originals”, Facsimile Ref-erence <Basic Features>. If the re-ceiver is T.37 full mode compliant,documents are sent at the widthspecified in the Address Book. Seep.55 “T.37 Full Mode”, FacsimileReference <Basic Features>.

AAAA Place the original on the exposureglass, and then select the scan set-tings you require.

Referencep.13 “Placing Originals”, Fac-simile Reference <Basic Features>

p.30 “Scan Settings”, FacsimileReference <Basic Features>

BBBB Press [Sub TX Mode].

CCCC Press [Book Fax].

DDDD Select the size of the original.

Note❒ To cancel this mode, press [Can-

cel]. The display returns to thatof step C.

❒ If you select A3, the original willbe sent using Image RotationTransmission. See p.79 “Trans-mission with Image Rotation”.

JupterC2_Fax_EN-F_FM.book Page 61 Monday, November 29, 2004 3:48 PM

Page 72: b 7128511

Other Transmission Features

62

4

EEEE Select [From First Page] or [FromSecond Page], and then press [OK].

The selected original size is shownabove the highlighted [Book Fax].

Note❒ Select [From First Page] to send a

book original from the firstpage.

❒ Select [From Second Page] if youwant to send a cover letter as thefirst page.

❒ To cancel this mode, press [Can-cel]. The display returns to thatof step C.

FFFF Press [OK].

GGGG Specify a destination, and then pressthe {{{{Start}}}} key.

Note❒ When sending more than one

page, place the originals indi-vidually, one after the other,pressing the {{{{Start}}}} key aftereach page.

❒ After the last original has beenscanned, press [####].

❒ If [####] is not pressed, the ma-chine will automatically startsending the documents, 60 sec-onds after the last original hasbeen scanned.

Two-Sided Transmission (Double-Sided Transmission)

The optional ADF is required.

Use this function to send two-sidedoriginals.

Note❒ Originals placed on the exposure

glass cannot be sent.❒ The front and back of the scanned

original will be printed in order onseparate sheets at the other end.The orientation of alternate sheetsmay be reversed at the other end. Ifyou want to print the original withthe same orientation at the otherend, specify the “Original Posi-tion” and “Page Opening Orienta-tion”.

JupterC2_Fax_EN-F_FM.book Page 62 Monday, November 29, 2004 3:48 PM

Page 73: b 7128511

Sub Transmission Mode

63

4

See p.79 “Transmission with Im-age Rotation”

❒ This function is only available withMemory Transmission.

❒ This function is only available withthe ADF.

❒ You can confirm whether bothsides were properly scanned usingthe Stamp function. See p.72“Stamp”.

❒ You can program one of the QuickOperation keys with operations forthis function. Using the quick op-eration keys allows you to omitstep B. See p.144 “General Set-tings/Adjustment”.

AAAA Place the original in the ADF, andthen select the scan settings yourequire.

Referencep.13 “Placing Originals”, Fac-simile Reference <Basic Features>

p.30 “Scan Settings”, FacsimileReference <Basic Features>

BBBB Press [Sub TX Mode].

CCCC Press [2 Sided Original].

DDDD Specify the original position.Check the orientation of the placeddocument, and then press or

.

Note❒ Make sure that the specified

original position matches theorientation of originals loadedin the ADF.

EEEE Specify the page opening orienta-tion from [Top to Top] or [Top to Bot-tom].

GHPY030E

JupterC2_Fax_EN-F_FM.book Page 63 Monday, November 29, 2004 3:48 PM

Page 74: b 7128511

Other Transmission Features

64

4

FFFF Specify the transmission modefrom [2 Sided from 1st Page] or [1 Sid-ed for 1st Page], and then press[OK].

The selected original position andpage opening orientation areshown above the highlighted [2Sided Original].

Note❒ To cancel this mode, press [Can-

cel]. The display returns to thatof step C.

❒ Select [2 Sided from 1st Page] tosend a two-sided original fromthe first page.

❒ Select [1 Sided for 1st Page] if youwant to send a cover letter as thefirst page.

GGGG Press [OK].

HHHH Specify the destination, and thenpress the {{{{Start}}}} key.

Standard Message Stamp

Use this function to stamp a standardmessage at the top of the first originalsent.There are four types of standard mes-sages: “Confidential”, “Urgent”,“Please phone”, and “Copy to corres ...”You can also program other messages.

Note❒ While this function is in use, the

third line of the Label Insertion isnot printed. See p.75 “Program-ming the Label Insertion”.

❒ When there is an image around thearea where the standard messageis to be stamped, that image is de-leted.

❒ To program a standard message,use the Program / Change / De-lete Standard Message function.See p.157 “Programming, Chang-ing, and Deleting Standard Mes-sages”.

AAAA Place the originals, and the selectthe scan settings you require.

Referencep.13 “Placing Originals”, Fac-simile Reference <Basic Features>p.30 “Scan Settings”, FacsimileReference <Basic Features>

BBBB Press [Sub TX Mode].

CCCC Press [Std. Message].

JupterC2_Fax_EN-F_FM.book Page 64 Monday, November 29, 2004 3:48 PM

Page 75: b 7128511

Sub Transmission Mode

65

4

DDDD Select the standard message to bestamped, and then press [OK].

The selected standard message isshown above the highlighted [Std.Message].

Note❒ To cancel the selection, press

[Cancel]. The display returns tothat of step C.

❒ Programmed standard messag-es are shown in the keys.

❒ The machine cannot stamp mul-tiple standard messages.

EEEE Press [OK].

FFFF Specify the destination, and thenpress the {{{{Start}}}} key.

Sending an Auto Document

If you often send a particular page topeople (for example a map, a stan-dard attachment, or a set of instruc-tions), store that page in memory asan Auto Document. This saves res-canning every time you want to sendit.You can fax an Auto Document by it-self, or attach it to a standard fax mes-sage.

PreparationYou need to register an Auto Doc-ument. See p.158 “Storing, Chang-in g , an d D e le t in g an A ut oDocument”.

Note❒ You can attach one Auto Docu-

ment to each transmission. ❒ You can store up to 6 Auto Docu-

ments. See p.158 “Storing, Chang-i ng , a nd D e le t in g an A ut oDocument”.

❒ Files with Auto Documents aresent by Memory Transmission.

❒ When sending an Auto Documentwith other files, the Auto Docu-ment is sent first.

❒ Storing Auto Documents reducesthe amount of free memory slight-ly. Unless you delete the docu-ment, free memory will not returnto 100%.

❒ You can print an Auto Documentcurrently stored in memory. Seep.66 “Printing documents storedas Auto Documents”.

❒ You can program one of the QuickOperation keys with operations forthis function. Using the quick op-eration keys allows you to omitstep B. See p.144 “General Set-tings/Adjustment”.

AAAA Place the original, and then selectthe scan settings you require.

Referencep.13 “Placing Originals”, Fac-simile Reference <Basic Features>p.30 “Scan Settings”, FacsimileReference <Basic Features>

Note❒ When you fax an Auto Docu-

ment, start from step B.

JupterC2_Fax_EN-F_FM.book Page 65 Monday, November 29, 2004 3:48 PM

Page 76: b 7128511

Other Transmission Features

66

4

BBBB Press [Sub TX Mode].

CCCC Press [Auto Document].

DDDD Select an Auto Document file, andthen press [OK].

When you fax an Auto Documentby itself, press [TX Stored File (AD)Only], and then press [OK].

The selected file name is shownabove the highlighted [Auto Docu-ment].

Note❒ Programmed Auto Documents

are shown in the keys.❒ To cancel the Auto Document,

press [Cancel]. The display re-turns to that of step C.

EEEE Press [OK].

FFFF Specify the destination, and thenpress the {{{{Start}}}} key.

Printing documents stored as Auto Documents

This function is used for printing doc-uments stored as Auto Documents.This function is very convenient as itcan be used for checking the contentsof stored files.

AAAA Press [Sub TX Mode].

BBBB Press [Auto Document].

CCCC Select an Auto Document file tobe printed, and then press [PrintFile].

Note❒ To cancel the Auto Document,

press [Cancel]. The display re-turns to that of step B.

DDDD Press the {{{{Start}}}} key.

Once printing is completed, thedisplay returns to that of step B.

Note❒ To cancel printing after pressing

the {{{{Start}}}} key, press [Stop Print-ing]. The display returns to thatof step B.

JupterC2_Fax_EN-F_FM.book Page 66 Monday, November 29, 2004 3:48 PM

Page 77: b 7128511

Sub Transmission Mode

67

4

EEEE Press [Cancel].

Note❒ You can also send Auto Docu-

ments. See p.65 “Sending anAuto Document”.

FFFF Press [OK].

The standby display appears.

Sending a Stored File

Use this function to send documentsstored in the Document Server. Youcan specify and send multiple docu-ments, and also send them withscanned originals all at once.You can also print stored originalswith [Print File]. See p.70 “Printingstored documents”.

PreparationStore the documents to be sent inadvance. You can program a pass-word for this function. You canchange the user names, file names,and passwords of stored docu-ments. See p.133 “Using the Docu-m e n t Se rv e r” , a nd p . 1 36“Changing Information of StoredDocuments”.

Note❒ Received fax documents are stored

and categorized as stored recep-tion files. See p.34 “Printing/De-l e t i n g R e c e i v ed a n d S t o r edDocuments (Print/Delete StoredRX File)”.

❒ You can program one of the QuickOperation keys with operations forthis function. Using the quick op-eration keys allows you to omitstep A. See p.144 “General Set-tings/Adjustment”.

Sending stored documents

The machine sends documents storedin the Document Server.The documents stored in the Docu-ment Server can be sent again andagain until they are deleted. Oncesent, documents are stored in theDocument Server. Therefore, you cansend them in just one operation with-out having to set your originals again.

Limitation❒ You cannot use the following trans-

mission methods:• Free Polling Transmission• Default ID Transmission• ID Override Transmission• Immediate Transmission• Parallel Memory Transmission• On Hook Dial• Manual Dial

Note❒ You can specify and print multiple

documents. You can specify a max-imum of 30 documents at once.

❒ The machine can send a total of1,000 pages in one operation.

JupterC2_Fax_EN-F_FM.book Page 67 Monday, November 29, 2004 3:48 PM

Page 78: b 7128511

Other Transmission Features

68

4

❒ The specified documents are sentwith the scan settings made whenthey were stored.

AAAA Press [Sub TX Mode].

BBBB Press [Select Stored File].

CCCC Select the documents to be sent.

Note❒ When multiple documents are

selected, they are sent in the or-der of selection.

❒ Press [TX Order] to arrange theorder of the documents to besent.

❒ Press [File Name] to place thedocuments in alphabetical or-der.

❒ Press [User Name] to place thedocuments in order by pro-grammed user name.

❒ Press [Date] to place the docu-ments in order of programmeddate.

Specifying documents from the file list

A Press [UUUU Prev.] or [TTTT Next] to dis-play the documents to be sent.

B Select the file.

Specifying documents from the User Name

A Select [Search by User Name].

B Select the user name of the pro-grammed document, and thenpress [OK].

Note❒ To search by user name, press

[Non-programmed Name], andthen enter the user name.Partial matching is usedwhen searching for a username. See p.172 “Using Par-tial matching”.

Reference“Entering Text”, General Set-tings Guide

C Select the file to be sent.

JupterC2_Fax_EN-F_FM.book Page 68 Monday, November 29, 2004 3:48 PM

Page 79: b 7128511

Sub Transmission Mode

69

4

Specifying documents from the file name

A Select [Search by File Name].

B Enter the name of the docu-ment to be sent, and then press[OK].

Note❒ Partial matching is used when

searching for a file name.C Select the file to be sent.

DDDD If you select a document with apassword, enter the password,and then press [OK].

If the document does not have apassword, proceed to step E.

EEEE When you want to add your origi-nals to stored documents andsend them all at once, press [RRRROr-igi. + Stored File] or [Stored file + RRRROrigi.].

When sending only stored docu-ments, proceed to step F.

Note❒ When [RRRROrigi. + Stored File] is

pressed, the machine sends theoriginals and then stored files.When [Stored file + RRRR Origi.] ispressed, the machine sends thestored files and then originals.

❒ The added originals are notstored.

FFFF Press [OK] twice.

Note❒ To add an original to stored

documents, place the original,and then select any scan settingsyou require.

GGGG Specify the destination, and thenpress the {{{{Start}}}} key.

JupterC2_Fax_EN-F_FM.book Page 69 Monday, November 29, 2004 3:48 PM

Page 80: b 7128511

Other Transmission Features

70

4

Printing stored documents

Use this function to print documentsstored in the Document Server.

Note❒ Only documents stored using the

facsimile function can be printed.❒ You can print documents saved

from the copy or the printer func-tion with the Document Server.You cannot print documents savedfrom the scanner function with thismode.

❒ You can also print the first pageonly to check the content of theoriginal.

❒ You can specify and print multipledocuments. You can specify a max-imum of 30 documents at one time.

AAAA Press [Sub TX Mode].

BBBB Press [Select Stored File].

CCCC Select the document to be printed.

Note❒ The documents stored using the

facsimile function appear on thedisplay.

❒ Press [File Name] to place thedocuments in alphabetical or-der.

❒ Press [User Name] to place docu-ments in order of programmeduser name.

❒ Press [Date] to place the docu-ments in order by the pro-grammed date.

❒ To see details of the selecteddocument, press [Detail]. To re-turn to the display in Step C,press [Select File].

Selecting a document from file list

A Select the file.

Note❒ Press [UUUU Prev.] or [TTTT Next] to

display the document to besent.

Specifying a document from the User Name

A Select [Search by User Name].

JupterC2_Fax_EN-F_FM.book Page 70 Monday, November 29, 2004 3:48 PM

Page 81: b 7128511

Sub Transmission Mode

71

4

B Press the user name of the doc-ument to be sent, and thenpress [OK].

Note❒ To search by user name, press

[Non-programmed Name], andthen enter the user name.

C Select the file.

Specifying a document from the file name

A Press [Search by File Name].

B Enter the file name to be print-ed, and then press [OK].

Note❒ Partial matching is used to

search for the file name.C Select the file.

DDDD If you select a document with apassword, enter the password,and then press [OK].

If the document does not have apassword, proceed to step E.

EEEE Press [Print File] or [Print 1st Page].

When [Print File] is pressed, the ma-chine prints all the pages. When[Print 1st Page] is pressed, the ma-chine prints only the first page.

Limitation❒ When [Print 1st Page] is selected,

originals larger than A4 size areprinted after they are reducedto A4 size.

❒ The machine can print up to 30files using the Print 1st Pagefunction.

Note❒ To print both sides, press [Print 2

Sided].❒ To cancel printing, press [Cancel].

FFFF Press the {{{{Start}}}} key.

Note❒ When only the first page is print-

ed, the file name is printed at thetop of the paper.

❒ To cancel printing after pressingthe {{{{Start}}}} key, press [Stop Print-ing].

GGGG Press [OK] twice.

The standby display appears.

FaxAdEN_Chapter-4 Page 71 Monday, December 20, 2004 11:21 AM

Page 82: b 7128511

Other Transmission Features

72

4

Stamp

The optional ADF is required.

When sending a fax message usingthe ADF, the machine can stamp a cir-cle mark at the bottom of the original.When sending a two-sided docu-ment, the document is marked at thebottom of the front page and top ofthe rear page. This stamp indicatesthat the original has been successfullystored in memory for Memory Trans-mission, or successfully sent by Im-mediate Transmission.

Note❒ Stamp only works when scanning

from the ADF.❒ When the stamp starts getting

lighter, replace the cartridge. See“Replacing the Stamp Cartridge”,General Settings Guide.

❒ If a page was not stamped eventhough the Stamp function isturned on, you need to resend thatpage.

❒ If you use this function often, youcan set the default in General Set-tings and Adjustment so that thisfunction is always on. In this case,Stamp can easily be turned off forany single transmission by press-ing [Stamp]. See p.144 “General Set-tings/Adjustment”.

❒ A paper jam during Parallel Mem-ory Transmission may cause thetransmission to be failed even ifstamping is performed.

❒ You cannot turn the Stamp func-tion on or off while a document isbeing scanned.

AAAA Place the original, and then selectthe scan settings you require.

Referencep.13 “Placing Originals”, Fac-simile Reference <Basic Features>

p.30 “Scan Settings”, FacsimileReference <Basic Features>

BBBB Press [Sub TX Mode].

CCCC Press [Stamp], and then press [OK].

Note❒ To cancel the stamp, press [Stamp]

again before pressing [OK].

DDDD Specify the destination, and thenpress the {{{{Start}}}} key.

JupterC2_Fax_EN-F_FM.book Page 72 Monday, November 29, 2004 3:48 PM

Page 83: b 7128511

Sub Transmission Mode

73

4

Transmission Options

This section describes various func-tions that you can switch on and offfor any particular transmission, fol-lowing the procedures given here.In addition, if you frequently use acertain option configuration, you canchange the default home position (onor off) of each option.

Fax Header Print

In some cases, you may want the oth-er party to receive an unmarked copyof your original. To do this, switchFax Header off.When the Fax Header is set to “ON”,the stored name is printed on the re-ceiver's paper.You can store two Fax Headers; “FirstName” and “Second Name”.For example, if you store your depart-ment name in one and your organiza-tion name in the other, you could usethe first when sending internal faxesand the second for external faxes.

Important❒ In the USA, the Fax Header must

contain the telephone number ofthe line your machine is connectedto. It will be printed on the headerof every page you send. Requiredin the USA.

Note❒ If you used the number keys to

specify the receiver, the first head-er name will be printed on the re-ceiver's paper.

❒ You can program fax header namesusing the Program Fax Informa-tion function.

❒ You can select whether or not dates,fax header names, file numbers, orpage numbers are printed bychanging their respective User Pa-rameters. (switch 18, bit 3, 2, 1, 0)See p.166 “User Parameters”.

❒ You can program one of the QuickOperation keys with operations forthis function. See p.144 “GeneralSettings/Adjustment”.

❒ In the USA, law requires that yourfax number be included in the FaxHeader. Program the fax numberand switch on Fax Header Printwith User Parameters. See, p.166“User Parameters”.

Label Insertion

With this function you can have thereceiver name printed on the messagewhen it is received at the other end.The name will be printed at the top ofthe page and will be preceded by“To”. You can also cause the text pro-grammed as a standard message to beprinted. See p.157 “Programming,Changing, and Deleting StandardMessages”.

Note❒ When there is an image around the

area where the Label is to be print-ed, that image is deleted.

❒ You can program one of the QuickOperation keys with operations forthis function. See p.144 “GeneralSettings/Adjustment”.

JupterC2_Fax_EN-F_FM.book Page 73 Monday, November 29, 2004 3:48 PM

Page 84: b 7128511

Other Transmission Features

74

4

Reduced Image Transmission

Using this function, your message issent at a reduced size (93%) with ablank margin on the left.

Note❒ This function is unavailable with

Immediate Transmission, or speci-fied transmission of a stored docu-ment.

❒ Image Rotation is unavailable withthis function.

Auto Reduce

When this function is turned on, if thereceiver's paper is smaller than thepaper you are sending on, the mes-sage is automatically reduced to fitonto the paper available at the otherend.

Important❒ If you turn this function off, the

scale of the original is maintainedand some parts of the image maybe deleted when printed at the oth-er end.

Default ID Transmission

If you turn this function on, transmis-sion will only take place if the desti-nation's Polling ID is the same asyours. This function can stop you ac-cidentally sending information to thewrong place.

PreparationYou need to register a polling IDbeforehand. See p.192 “Program-ming a Polling ID”.

Limitation❒ This function is not available with

Internet Fax.

Note❒ You can program one of the Quick

Operation keys with operations forthis function. See p.144 “GeneralSettings/Adjustment”.

JupterC2_Fax_EN-F_FM.book Page 74 Monday, November 29, 2004 3:48 PM

Page 85: b 7128511

Sub Transmission Mode

75

4

Selecting transmission options for a single transmission

AAAA Place the original, and then selectthe scan settings you require.

Referencep.13 “Placing Originals”, Fac-simile Reference <Basic Features>p.30 “Scan Settings”, FacsimileReference <Basic Features>

BBBB Press [Sub TX Mode].

CCCC Select [Options].

DDDD Select options to be set up.

Note❒ To close the option settings, pro-

ceed to step E.

Programming the Fax Header Print

A Press [On] for Fax Header Print.

Note❒ Press [Off] if you do not want

to print the sender name.

Programming the Label Insertion

A Press [Programmed Name] for La-bel Insertion.

Note❒ Press [Off] if you do not want

to insert a destination.

Programming the Reduced Image Transmission

A Press [On] in for Reduced Im-age TX.

Note❒ Press [Off] if you do not want

to do a reduced transmission.

Programming the Auto Reduce

A Press [On] for Auto Reduce.

Note❒ Press [Off] if you do not want

to use the Auto Reduce func-tion.

Programming the Default ID Transmission

A Press [On] for Default ID TX.

Note❒ Press [Off] if you do not want

to use ID transmission.

EEEE Press [OK] twice.

JupterC2_Fax_EN-F_FM.book Page 75 Monday, November 29, 2004 3:48 PM

Page 86: b 7128511

Other Transmission Features

76

4

FFFF Specify the destination, and thenpress the {{{{Start}}}} key.

Note❒ To cancel the option settings,

press [Cancel].

JupterC2_Fax_EN-F_FM.book Page 76 Monday, November 29, 2004 3:48 PM

Page 87: b 7128511

More Transmission Functions

77

4

More Transmission Functions

If Memory Runs Out While Storing an Original

If you run out of memory while stor-ing an original (free space reaches0%), the message “Memory is full.Cannot scan more. Transmittingonly scanned pages. Transmit-ting only scanned pages.” is dis-played.Press [Exit] to transmit stored pagesonly.

Note❒ In default, scanned pages are sent.

To change the settings to deletescanned pages, contact your ser-vice representative.

Parallel Memory Transmission

This function dials while the originalis being scanned. Standard MemoryTransmission stores the original inmemory, then dials the destination.Parallel Memory Transmission al-lows you to quickly determinewhether a connection was made. Inaddition, this function scans the orig-inal faster than Immediate Transmis-sion. This is useful when you are in ahurry and need to use the original foranother purpose.

Limitation❒ Standard Memory Transmission is

used instead of Parallel MemoryTransmission in the following cas-es:• When the line is busy and could

not be connected to• With Send Later

• When you store an original forMemory Transmission whileanother communication is inprogress

• When two or more destinationsare specified

• When you send only an AutoDocument

• When an original is placed onthe exposure glass, and thensent

• When you send messages storedin the Document Server

Note❒ You can turn this function on or off

with the User Parameters. Seep.166 “User Parameters” (switch07, bit 2).

❒ Standard Memory Transmissionmay be used instead of ParallelMemory Transmission dependingon the optional equipment in-stalled if there is not enough freememory left.

❒ If you use this function, the Memo-ry Storage Report will not be print-ed.

❒ If the {{{{Clear/Stop}}}} key is pressed, anoriginal will jam or memory willrun out during Parallel MemoryTransmission stops. The Commu-nication Result Report is printedand files are deleted.

❒ When using Parallel Memory Trans-mission, only the original pages areprinted without automaticallyprinting the total number of origi-nals in “Fax Header Print”.

FaxAdEN_Chapter-4 Page 77 Wednesday, January 19, 2005 2:34 PM

Page 88: b 7128511

Other Transmission Features

78

4

Checking the Transmission Result

• Turn the Immediate TX Result Re-port on if you want a report to beprinted after every successfultransmission. See p.81 “Communi-cation Result Report (MemoryTransmission)”.

• If you leave the Immediate TX Re-sult Report off, the report will notbe printed after every transmis-sion. However, if a transmissionfails, a Communication Failure Re-port will be printed instead. Seep.81 “Communication Result Re-port (Memory Transmission)” andp.82 “Communication Failure Re-port”.

• You can also check the transmis-sion result by examining the Jour-n a l . Se e p . 27 “P r i n t i n g t h eJournal”.

• You can either print or scrollthrough the Journal on the display.See p.31 “Checking the Transmis-sion Result (TX File Status)”.

Automatic Redial

If a fax message could not be sent be-cause the line was busy or an error oc-curred during transmission, the lineis switched to another at five-minuteintervals and redial is attempted upto five times.If redialing fails after four redials, themachine cancels the transmission andprints an Communication Result Re-port or Communication Failure Re-port. See p.82 “CommunicationFailure Report”. and p.81 “Communi-cation Result Report (Memory Trans-mission)”.

Batch Transmission

If you send a fax message by MemoryTransmission and there is another faxmessage waiting in memory to besent to the same destination, thatmessage is sent along with your orig-inal. Several fax messages can be sentwith a single call, thus eliminating theneed for several separate calls. Thishelps save communication costs andreduce transmission time.Fax messages for which the transmis-sion time has been set in advance aresent by batch transmission when thattime is reached.

Limitation❒ This function is not available with

Internet Fax and IP-Fax.

Note❒ You can turn this function on or off

with the User Parameters. Seep.166 “User Parameters” (switch14, bit 2).

❒ The originals to be transmitted at aspecific time will be sent at thattime.

❒ If fax memory is overloaded, mes-sages may not be sent in the orderthey were scanned.

Dual Access

The machine can scan other messagesinto memory even while sending afax message from memory, receivinga message into memory, or automati-cally printing a report. Since the ma-chine starts sending the secondmessage immediately after the cur-rent transmission ends, the line isused efficiently.

FaxAdEN_Chapter-4 Page 78 Wednesday, January 19, 2005 2:34 PM

Page 89: b 7128511

More Transmission Functions

79

4

Note❒ Note that during Immediate Trans-

mission or when in User Toolsmode, the machine cannot scan anoriginal.

Transmission with Image Rotation

Generally, place A4, 81/2"×11" origi-nals in the landscape orientation (L).If you place an A4, 81/2"×11" originalin the portrait orientation (K), theimage will be sent rotated by 90°. Pro-viding the receiver has A4, 81/2"×11"landscape paper (L), the messagewill be printed the same size as theoriginal.

Note❒ This function is unavailable with

Immediate Transmission.❒ When Image Rotation is used, all

messages are sent by normal Mem-ory Transmission.

❒ This function is unavailable whenusing Mixed Original Sizes.

Simultaneous Broadcast

The optional extra G3 interface unit is re-quired.

The Standard Broadcast functionsends faxes one at a time to multipledestinations in the order of specifieddestinations.The Simultaneous Broadcast func-tion, however, can simultaneouslysend faxes to multiple destinationsusing different lines.

This results in a shorter overall trans-mission time.

Note❒ A maximum of four simultaneous

transmissions (including LAN) arepossible.

❒ When using the optional extra G3interface unit, if you set the line se-lection as “G3 Auto” beforehand,the machine will use whichever G3line is not busy. This increases effi-ciency.

JBIG Transmission

If you use JBIG (Joint Bi-level ImageExperts Group) compression, you cansend photographic originals fasterthan with other methods of compres-sion.

Referencep.31 “Original Type”, Facsimile Ref-erence <Basic Features>

Limitation❒ You can only use this function

with telephone line.❒ This function requires that the oth-

er party's fax machine has both theJBIG function and ECM function(G3 communication only).

Note❒ If ECM is turned off, JBIG Trans-

mission is unavailable. See p.165“ECM (Error Correction Mode)”.

JupterC2_Fax_EN-F_FM.book Page 79 Monday, November 29, 2004 3:48 PM

Page 90: b 7128511

Other Transmission Features

80

4

Transmitting Journal by E-mail

PreparationTo transmit the Journal by e-mail,it is necessary to make settingswith User Parameters. See p.166“User Parameters” (switch 21, bit4).

The Journal is automatically transmit-ted to an e-mail address of the admin-istrator by every 50 communications.A CSV format Journal is attached tothe e-mail.

Important❒ This machine does not store sent

CSV files. It is recommended thatyou double-check the e-mail ad-dress of an administrator beforethe Journal is transmitted. If the e-mail address of the administratoris not correct, your important Jour-nal may be lost and sent CSV file isnot left on the fax machine. See“File Transfer”, Network Guide.

Note❒ If the administrator address is

wrong, you may not be able to ac-quire Journal.

❒ If the Journal in e-mail format failsto be transmitted, the Journal isprinted out.

❒ The name of an attached CSV file is“JOURNAL+year, month, hours, min-utes”. For example, the file name trans-mitted in 14:40:12 on 20th, March, 2005is “JOURNAL20050320144012.csv”.

❒ The subject of Journal by e-mail be-gins with “Journal”.

Journal by E-mail

If the setting is made so that the Jour-nal is transmitted as e-mail, it is trans-mitted to the e-mail address of anadministrator.This section describes the CSV formatof the Journal attached with e-mail.

Note❒ To transmit the Journal, it is neces-

sary to make settings with User Pa-r am e t e rs . Se e p . 1 66 “ U s erParameters” (switch 21, bit 4).

❒ You can display a sender namewith the User Parameters. Seep.166 “User Parameters” (switch04, bit 5).

❒ To set the administrator e-mail ad-dress, see “File Transfer”, NetworkGuide.

❒ Depending on security settings,the Destination/Sender name maynot appear.

JupterC2_Fax_EN-F_FM.book Page 80 Monday, November 29, 2004 3:48 PM

Page 91: b 7128511

Printed Report

81

4

Printed Report

Memory Storage Report

This report is printed after an originalis stored in memory. It helps you re-view the contents and the destina-tions of stored originals.

Limitation❒ If you use Parallel Memory Trans-

mission, the Memory Storage Re-port is not printed.

Note❒ You can turn this report on and off.

See p.166 “User Parameters”(switch 03, bit 2).

❒ Even if the machine is set up not toprint this report, it is still printed ifan original could not be stored.

❒ You can select whether to includepart of the original image on the re-port. See p.166 “User Parameters”(switch 04, bit 7).

❒ You can display a destination withthe User Parameters. See p.166“User Parameters” (switch 04, bit4).

❒ You can display a sender namewith the User Parameters. Seep.166 “User Parameters” (switch04, bit 5).

Communication Result Report (Memory Transmission)

This report is printed when a Memo-ry Transmission is completed, so youcan check the result of the transmis-sion. If E-mail TX Results is pro-grammed in a Quick Operation key,you can select whether a report e-mailis sent after transmission. See p.146“Quick Operation Key”.

Note❒ If two or more destinations are

specified, this report is printed af-ter the fax message has been sent toall the destinations.

❒ If the machine is set up not to printthis report and the fax messagecould not be successfully transmit-ted, a Communication Failure Re-p o r t i s p r i nt e d . Se e p . 82“Communication Failure Report”.

❒ You can turn this function on or offwith the User Parameters. Seep.166 “User Parameters” (switch03, bit 0).

❒ You can select whether to includepart of the original image on the re-port. See p.166 “User Parameters”(switch 04, bit 7).

❒ To view the report without textdisruption, select a font of evencharacter width in your e-mail ap-plication's settings.

❒ You can display a destination withthe User Parameters. See p.166“User Parameters” (switch 04, bit4).

❒ You can display a sender namewith the User Parameters. Seep.166 “User Parameters” (switch04, bit 5).

❒ The Page column gives the totalnumber of pages. The Not Sent col-umn gives the number of pagesthat could not be sent successfully.

❒ -- column indicates the InternetFax document was sent to the mailserver programmed in this ma-chine. (However, this does notmean the e-mail was delivered.)

JupterC2_Fax_EN-F_FM.book Page 81 Monday, November 29, 2004 3:48 PM

Page 92: b 7128511

Other Transmission Features

82

4

Communication Failure Report

This report is printed when a messagecould not be successfully transmittedwith Memory Transmission.If the machine is set up to print an Im-mediate TX Result Report, this reportis not printed. Use it to keep a recordof failed transmissions so you cansend them again.

Note❒ You can select whether the Com-

munication Failure Report andTransfer Result Report be auto-matically printed using the UserParameters. See p.166 “User Pa-rameters” (switch 04, bit 1).

❒ This report is only printed if theImmediate TX Result Report isturned off and a message could notbe successfully transmitted withMemory Transmission.

❒ You can select whether to includepart of the original image on the re-port. See p.166 “User Parameters”(switch 04, bit 7).

❒ You can display a destination withthe User Parameters. See p.166“User Parameters” (switch 04, bit4).

❒ You can display a sender namewith the User Parameters. Seep.166 “User Parameters” (switch04, bit 5).

❒ The Page column gives the totalnumber of pages. The Not Sent col-umn gives the number of pagesthat could not be sent successfully.

❒ Unprogrammed destination col-umn indicates the message couldnot be sent because the transfer'sfax number is incorrect, or not pro-grammed.

❒ -- column indicates the InternetFax document was sent to the mailserver programmed in this ma-chine. (However, this does notmean the e-mail was delivered.)

Immediate TX Result Report (Immediate Transmission)

If you turn this report on, a report willbe printed after every ImmediateTransmission so you have a record ofwhether the transmission was suc-cessful or not. If the machine is set upnot to print this report and the faxmessage could not be successfullytransmitted, the Error Report is print-ed instead. If E-mail TX Results isprogrammed in a Quick Operationkey, you can select whether a reporte-mail is sent after transmission. Seep.146 “Quick Operation Key”.

Note❒ You can switch this report on or off

in the User Parameters. See p.166“User Parameters” (switch 03, bit5).

❒ To view the report without textDisruption, select a font of evencharacter width in your e-mail ap-plication's settings.

❒ You can display a destination withthe User Parameters. See p.166“User Parameters” (switch 04, bit4).

❒ If the page was sent successfully,the Page column gives the totalnumber of pages sent successfully.

JupterC2_Fax_EN-F_FM.book Page 82 Monday, November 29, 2004 3:48 PM

Page 93: b 7128511

83

5. Reception Features

Reception

Immediate Reception

Each page of a fax message is printedas soon as it is received. This methodis used for standard fax messages.

Normally this machine receives mes-sages by Immediate Reception. ButMemory Reception is used when“Combine 2 originals”, “Multi-copyReception”, “RX Reverse Printing” or“2 Sided Print” is set to “ON”. Seep.96 “Printing Options”. If the condi-tions are that Substitute Receptionshould be used, a fax message is notprinted. It will be stored in memory.See p.83 “Memory Reception”. Seep.85 “Substitute Reception”.

Note❒ The machine may not be able to re-

ceive fax messages when freememory space is low.

❒ If free memory reaches 0% duringImmediate Reception, any furtherreception becomes impossible andthe current communication is ter-minated.

❖❖❖❖ Reception resolution This machine supports Standard,Detail, and Super Fine resolutionsfor reception. If you do not havethe optional Expansion Memory,faxes sent at Super Fine resolutionwill be printed on your machine atDetail resolution. This may differfrom the sender's intended resolu-tion. See p.30 “Resolution”, Facsim-ile Reference <Basic Features>.

Memory Reception

The machine waits until all pages ofthe message have been received intomemory before printing it.

This method is used with the follow-ing functions:• Combine 2 originals

See p.99 “Combine Two Origi-nals”.

• Multi-copy when set to multiplecopiesSee p.98 “Multi-copy Reception”.

• Reverse Order PrintingSee p.100 “Reverse Order Print-ing”.

• 2 sided PrintingSee p.97 “Two-Sided Printing”.

JupterC2_Fax_EN-F_FM.book Page 83 Monday, November 29, 2004 3:48 PM

Page 94: b 7128511

Reception Features

84

5

Important❒ When about one hour passes after

power of the machine is turned off,all fax messages stored in memorywill be lost. If any messages havebeen lost for this reason, a PowerFailure Report is automaticallyprinted when the operation switchis turned on. Use this report toidentify lost messages.

❒ The machine may not be able to re-ceive large numbers of messagesor messages with high data con-tent. In such cases, we recommendyou switch off the above functionsor install the optional expansionmemory.

Limitation❒ The machine may not be able to re-

ceive fax messages when freememory space is low.

Note❒ If the free memory space reaches

0% during Memory Reception, themachine can no longer receive thecurrent fax message and stopscommunicating.

❒ If you have selected Store for Re-ception File Setting, received mes-sages will be saved on the harddisk and will not be printed. Youcan print those messages by oper-ating the machine or a connectedcomputer, as necessary. See p.193“Storing or Printing Received Doc-uments”.

JupterC2_Fax_EN-F_FM.book Page 84 Monday, November 29, 2004 3:48 PM

Page 95: b 7128511

Reception

85

5

Substitute Reception

In Substitute Reception, a received fax message is stored in memory instead ofbeing printed. Substitute Reception gets used when the machine cannot printany fax messages. Fax messages received using Substitute Reception are auto-matically printed when the condition which caused the machine to use Substi-tute Reception is rectified.Depending on why the machine cannot print, Substitute Reception might beused for all fax messages received, or for only those messages that match a spec-ified condition.The Receive File indicator lights to let you know when fax messages have beenreceived using Substitute Reception.

Note❒ Reception may not take place if there is not enough free memory.❒ If free memory reaches 0% during Substitute Reception, any further reception

becomes impossible and the current communication is terminated.❒ When a fax message is received after Store has been selected for Reception

File Setting in the Facsimile Features menu, the Receive File indicator lights.

Receiving messages unconditionally

If one of the conditions listed below occurs, the machine receives all fax messag-es using Substitute Reception.

Problems Causes Solutions

x is lit. Paper is jammed. Remove the jammed paper.

See “xClearing Misfeeds”, General Settings Guide.

The machine is printing with other function.

The machine is busy print-ing with other function.

The message will be automatically printed after the current job finishes.

The message “Follow-ing output tray is full. Remove pa-per.” appears.

The output tray is full. Remove paper from the output tray.

M is lit. The cover is open. Close the cover shown in the display.

AAG016S

JupterC2_Fax_EN-F_FM.book Page 85 Monday, November 29, 2004 3:48 PM

Page 96: b 7128511

Reception Features

86

5

Receiving messages according to parameter-specified settings

If one of the conditions listed below occurs, the machine receives only those mes-sages that match the conditions specified in the User Parameters. See p.166 “Us-er Parameters” (switch 05, bit 2,1).

You can specify the following conditions with the User Parameters. See p.166“User Parameters” (switch 05, bit 2,1).

❖❖❖❖ When Own Name or Own Fax Number is receivedThe machine switches to Substitute Reception only when the sender has pro-grammed their Own Name or Own Fax Number. If the power is switched offfor more than an hour, all the messages stored in memory are deleted. In thatcase, the Power Failure Report or the Journal can be used to identify whichmessages are lost so you can ask the senders to transmit them again.

Important❒ If a sender has not programmed their Own Name or Own Fax Number, the

machine may fail to receive an important fax message. We recommendthat you ask important senders to program an Own Name or Own FaxNumber in advance.

❖❖❖❖ FreeThe machine switches to Substitute Reception regardless of whether or notthe sender has programmed their Own Name or Own Fax Number.

❖❖❖❖ Polling ID matchThe machine switches to Substitute Reception only when the programmedPolling ID of the other end matches the ID of this machine.

❖❖❖❖ DisableThe machine does not receive any messages.

Problems Causes Solutions

B is lit. All trays out of paper. Add paper. See “BLoading Paper” , General Settings Guide.

D is lit. Toner is empty. Replace the toner cartridge. See “DAdding Toner”, General Settings Guide.

The message “This tray is out of or-der.” appears.

All trays out of action. Call your service representative.

JupterC2_Fax_EN-F_FM.book Page 86 Monday, November 29, 2004 3:48 PM

Page 97: b 7128511

Reception Functions

87

5

Reception Functions

Transfer Station

Transfer Stations allow you to expandthe standard functions of your faxmachine to set up complex networks.The diagram below may make theconcept clearer.

The following terminologies are usedin this section:

❖❖❖❖ Requesting PartyThe machine where the messageoriginates.

❖❖❖❖ Transfer Station (this machine)The machine that forwards the in-coming message to another desti-nation.

❖❖❖❖ Receiving StationThe facsimile or computer that re-ceived the message from theTransfer Station.The final destination of the mes-sage, that is the machine the Trans-fer Station sends to. ReceivingStations must be programmed intoa Quick Dial or Groups in theTransfer Station.

PreparationThis machine can receive forward-ing requests by e-mail. Before youcan use this function, you mustmake the following preparations.• Program each Transfer Station

number in this machine (Trans-fer Station) and in the Request-ing Party i t sel f . See p.190“Transfer Report”.

• Program the same Polling ID inboth this machine (Transfer Sta-tion) and the Requesting Party.See p.192 “Programming a Poll-ing ID”.

• The Requesting Party's faxnumber must be programmedin the destination list of this ma-chine (Transfer Station). Theregistration number must be be-tween 00001 and 00100.

• The End Receiver's fax number,e-mail address, or IP-Fax desti-nation, must be programmed inthe destination list or GroupDial of this machine (TransferStation).

Note❒ You cannot receive e-mails unless

your machine has the capacity tostore two or more destinationsspecified using the number keys.

❒ If the Requesting Party specifies aGroup for the Receiving Stationsand the total number of ReceivingStations exceeds 500, the TransferStation cannot transfer the mes-sage and sends a Transfer ResultReport to the Requesting Party.

GFTRRQ2E

JupterC2_Fax_EN-F_FM.book Page 87 Monday, November 29, 2004 3:48 PM

Page 98: b 7128511

Reception Features

88

5

❒ If the Requesting Party specified adestination fax number, InternetFax destination and IP-Fax desti-nation programmed in TransferStation as End Receiver, this ma-chine sends the message to the des-tination according to the UserParameter setting. See p.166 “UserParameters” (switch 32, bit 0).

----Multistep transferThe principles of Transfer Stationscan be used to build up a multi-stepfacsimile network where messagesare passed through several TransferStations. By programming the Receiv-ing Stations in a Transfer StationGroup, you can enable this machineto transfer messages onto otherTransfer Stations.For more information, contact yourservice representative. This function can only be used if themachines are made by the same man-ufacturer.

----Sending the Transfer Result Report

This machine compares the fax num-ber of the Requesting Party with theRequesting Party's number pro-grammed as a Quick Dial or Speed Di-al. If the lower five digits of the twonumbers match, it sends the TransferResult Report to the Requesting Party.For example:• Requesting Party's own dial num-

ber:001813-11112222

• Transfer Station's Quick Dial:03-11112222

Transfer Result Report

PreparationProgram the Requesting Party faxnumber into a Quick Dial key inthe Transfer Station (this machine)in advance. Program your own fax number.See p.190 “Transfer Report”.Program the Polling ID. See p.192“Programming a Polling ID”.

This reports whether transmission tothe Receiving Stations was successfulor not.When the Transfer Station has trans-ferred the message to all ReceivingStations, it sends the Transfer ResultReport back to the Requesting Party.The machine prints the report if itcannot be sent back to the RequestingParty.

Note❒ You can select whether the Com-

munication Failure Report andTransfer Result Report be auto-matically printed using the UserParameters. See p.166 “User Pa-rameters” (switch 04, bit 1).

❒ You can set whether a portion ofthe original image is printed on thereport with the User Parameters.See p.166 “User Parameters”(switch 04, bit 7).

❒ Unprogrammed destination col-umn indicates the message couldnot be sent because the end receiv-er's address is incorrect or not pro-grammed.

❒ -- column indicates the InternetFax document was sent to the mailserver programmed in this ma-chine.

JupterC2_Fax_EN-F_FM.book Page 88 Monday, November 29, 2004 3:48 PM

Page 99: b 7128511

Reception Functions

89

5

Transfer Result Report (transfer request by e-mail)

When this machine receives a transferrequest by e-mail, the Transfer ResultReport is sent by e-mail to the Re-questing Party after completing alltransmissions to the specified Trans-fer Stations. If the Administrator's e-mail address has been programmed,the Transfer Result Report e-mail isforwarded to that address.

Note❒ Unprogrammed destination col-

umn indicates the message couldnot be sent because the end receiv-er's address is incorrect or not pro-grammed.

❒ -- column indicates the InternetFax document was sent to the mailserver programmed in this ma-chine.

❒ When using multistep transfer, theTransfer Result Report e-mail issent to the last Transfer Station thatsent Transfer Request.

JupterC2_Fax_EN-F_FM.book Page 89 Monday, November 29, 2004 3:48 PM

Page 100: b 7128511

Reception Features

90

5

Forwarding Received Documents

This machine can forward received documents to other destinations pro-grammed in memory based on Own Name, Own Fax Number or sender's e-mailaddress. A fax number, Internet Fax address, IP-Fax address, or folder addresscan be set as a Transfer Box. If a sender's e-mail address is programmed as thedestination, documents received are forwarded as e-mail.

Limitation❒ A maximum of 500 parties can be specified in a group.

Note❒ You need to specify the Forwarding destination in advance. See p.162 “For-

warding”.❒ If you want to forward documents to a different destination depending on the

sender, see p.171 “Special Senders to Treat Differently”.❒ You can select whether the machine prints out the messages it forwards with

User Parameters (switch 11, bit 6). For details, see p.166 “User Parameters”.

ADJ009S

JupterC2_Fax_EN-F_FM.book Page 90 Monday, November 29, 2004 3:48 PM

Page 101: b 7128511

Reception Functions

91

5

Routing Received Documents with SUB Code

When a document is received, its SUB Code is compared to user codes pro-grammed in Personal Boxes and, if a match is found, the document is routed tothe destination whose user code is specified. If the destination specified is an e-mail address, the received document is routed to that destination as e-mail.In addition to SUB Codes, you can use the forward feature to send all receivedtransmissions to a specific e-mail address. See p.162 “Forwarding”.

PreparationYou must set the Personal Box and register a deliver destination beforehand.See p.181 “Programming/changing Personal Boxes”.

Limitation❒ This function is not available when you set received documents to be deliv-

ered to the network delivery server.

Note❒ You can route documents received from any fax machine, regardless of man-

ufacturer.

Transferring Received Documents

Originals sent with a SUB Code that matches the SUB Code programmed as aTransfer Box are received then relayed to the programmed receiver.When e-mail addresses are programmed in the Transfer Station as receivers, re-ceived messages are sent in an e-mail format to the receivers.

PreparationTransfer Boxes and Receiving Stations must be set up in order to transfer re-ceived documents. See p.186 “Programming/changing Transfer Boxes”.

Note❒ Transfer Results are not sent back to Requesting Party.❒ You can transfer data received from any fax machine, regardless of manufacturer.

ADJ010S

JupterC2_Fax_EN-F_FM.book Page 91 Monday, November 29, 2004 3:48 PM

Page 102: b 7128511

Reception Features

92

5

SMTP Reception Using Internet Fax

You can set this machine to SMTP reception.With SMTP reception, e-mail is received as soon as it is sent to the e-mail addressset by the machine. You can route received e-mail to other Internet Fax machinesas well.

PreparationSet this machine beforehand using the MX record of the DNS server to enableSMTP reception. Also, set the reception protocol to SMTP under “System Ini-tial Setting”. See “Connection and Setup”, Network Guide.

Note❒ Even if SMTP reception is enabled on the DNS server, e-mail sent from the

SMTP server will not be received and the machine reports an error if SMTPreception is not set. Also, the SMTP server sends an error notification to theoriginator.

❒ If an error occurs while receiving e-mail, reception is aborted, the e-mail is de-leted, and Error Report is printed. Also, the SMTP server will send an errornotification to the originator.

❒ When the SMTP server attempts to route received documents to this machinewhile the machine is transmitting an e-mail, the machine will respond to theSMTP server with a “busy” signal. Then, the SMTP server usually tries re-sending the documents until the set timeout.

Referencep.66 “Auto E-mail Reception”, Facsimile Reference <Basic Features>

p.93 “Routing E-mail Received via SMTP”

ADJ011S

JupterC2_Fax_EN-F_FM.book Page 92 Monday, November 29, 2004 3:48 PM

Page 103: b 7128511

Reception Functions

93

5

Routing E-mail Received via SMTP

E-mail received via SMTP can be routed to other fax machines. It can also berouted to destinations programmed as Quick Dial entries or Groups.

PreparationBefore routing e-mail received via SMTP, you first must set “SMTP RX FileDelivery Settings” to “On”. See p.148 “E-mail Settings” .

Limitation❒ Depending on security settings, this function may not be available.

Note❒ If an e-mail transfer request is received when the “SMTP RX File Delivery Set-

tings” to “Off”, this machine responds with an error message to the SMTPserver.

❒ You can make settings that limit transfer to specified originators. See p.148“E-mail Settings”.

❒ Using this function, you can also send documents from your e-mail softwareto e-mail addresses and G3 fax machines' destinations through this machinesimultaneously. For details about specifying the destinations of fax machines,see the following.

ADJ012S

JupterC2_Fax_EN-F_FM.book Page 93 Monday, November 29, 2004 3:48 PM

Page 104: b 7128511

Reception Features

94

5

----Specifying E-mail Transfer The originator can request transfer of e-mail sent to another fax machine by spec-ifying the e-mail address as follows:

❖❖❖❖ Fax Number fax=destination fax number@host name of this machine. domain name Example: to transfer to fax number 212-123-4567, specify: [email protected]

❖❖❖❖ Quick Dial Destination fax=#registration number of 5 digits or less@host name of this machine.do-main name Example: to transfer to the destination number 00001: fax=#[email protected]

❖❖❖❖ Group Destination fax=#**registration number of 5 digits or less@host name of this machine.do-main name Example: to transfer to the destination programmed under Group number 04: fax=#**[email protected]

Limitation❒ A maximum of 500 parties can be specified in a group.

JupterC2_Fax_EN-F_FM.book Page 94 Monday, November 29, 2004 3:48 PM

Page 105: b 7128511

Reception Functions

95

5

JBIG Reception

If you use JBIG (Joint Bi-level ImageExperts Group) compression, you cansend photographic originals fasterthan with other methods of compres-sion. It allows you to receive messag-es sent in the JBIG format throughJBIG Transmission.

Limitation❒ You can only use this function

with telephone line.❒ If ECM is turned off, JBIG Recep-

tion is unavailable. See p.165“ECM (Error Correction Mode)”.

Auto Fax Reception Power-up

This machine can be set to shut downautomatically if no one has used it fora while. In these situations, eventhough the operation switch is off, themachine can still receive incomingmessages as long as the main powerswitch is on.

Important❒ Reception is not possible if both

the operation switch and mainpower switch are turned off.

Note❒ You can set whether messages are

printed as soon as they are re-ceived (Immediate Reception)with the User Parameters. Seep.166 “User Parameters” (switch14, bit 0).

❒ You can also have fax messages re-ceived by Memory Reception(Substitute Reception) printed af-ter the machine is turned on.

JupterC2_Fax_EN-F_FM.book Page 95 Monday, November 29, 2004 3:48 PM

Page 106: b 7128511

Reception Features

96

5

Printing Options

Print Completion Beep

When this function is turned on, themachine beeps to let you know whena received message has been printed.

Note❒ You can alter the volume of the

beep or turn it off completely (setthe volume to the minimum level).See p.83 “Adjusting the Volume”,Facsimile Reference <Basic Features>.

Checkered Mark

When this function is turned on, aCheckered Mark is printed on thefirst page of fax messages to help youseparate them.

Note❒ You can turn this function on or off

using Reception Setting. See p.147“Reception Settings”.

Center Mark

When this function is enabled, marksare printed halfway down the leftside or at the top center of each pagereceived. This makes it easy for you toposition a hole puncher correctlywhen you file received messages.

Note❒ The Center Mark may deviate a lit-

tle from the exact center of theedge.

❒ You can turn enabled/disable thisfunction using Reception Settings.See p.147 “Reception Settings”.

JupterC2_Fax_EN-F_FM.book Page 96 Monday, November 29, 2004 3:48 PM

Page 107: b 7128511

Printing Options

97

5

Reception Time

You can have the date and time print-ed at the bottom of the message whenit is received. You can turn this func-tion on or off using Reception Set-tings. See p.147 “Reception Settings”.

Note❒ When a received message is print-

ed on two or more sheets, the dateand time is printed on the lastpage.

❒ The date and time when the mes-sage was printed can also be re-corded on the message. If you needthis function, contact your servicerepresentative.

❒ You can turn this function on or offusing Reception Settings. See p.147“Reception Settings”.

Two-Sided Printing

You can have a received messageprinted on both sides of a sheet. Youcan turn this function on or off usingReception Settings. See p.147 “Recep-tion Settings”.

Limitation❒ To use this function, all pages of

the received document must be ofthe same size—inform the sendingparty of this beforehand if neces-sary. You must also have paper setin your machine of the same size asthat sent by the sending party. InTwo–Sided Printing, this machinewill correctly receive in A3L, B4JIS (Japanese Industrial Stan-dard)L , A4KL, B5 JISKL,A5KL(11"×17"L, 81/2"×14"L,81/2"×11"KL, 81/2"×51/2"L). Thefollowing table shows the resultsthat can be achieved when receiv-ing with this machine.

❒ This function works only when allpages are of the same width andreceived into memory.

❒ This function cannot be used withCombine Two Originals.

❒ An external tray cannot be used asa destination for two-sided printedsheets.

JupterC2_Fax_EN-F_FM.book Page 97 Monday, November 29, 2004 3:48 PM

Page 108: b 7128511

Reception Features

98

5

Note❒ The machine will use Memory Re-

ception for Two-Sided Printing.❒ Printouts may vary depending on

how the sender sets the originals.❒ You can select to have messages

only from selected senders printedin this way. See p.171 “SpecialSenders to Treat Differently”.

❒ Stored documents of the same sizeare printed on the same paper.Some stored documents may beunavailable for this printing op-tion.

180-Degree Rotation Printing

When printing on both sides of thepaper, this machine rotates images asshown in the diagram.

Multi-copy Reception

If you switch this function on, multi-ple copies of each incoming fax mes-sage will be printed. You can alsoselect to have multiple copies made ofmessages from particular senders.See p.171 “Special Senders to TreatDifferently”. See p.147 “ReceptionSettings”.

Note❒ The maximum number of copies

that can be made for each messageis 10.

❒ When you are using the Multi-Copy function with specified send-ers, the maximum number of cop-ies is 10.

❒ You can turn this function on or offusing Reception Settings. See p.147“Reception Settings”.

❒ The machine will use Memory Re-ception for Multi-copy Reception.

CP2B02E0

JupterC2_Fax_EN-F_FM.book Page 98 Monday, November 29, 2004 3:48 PM

Page 109: b 7128511

Printing Options

99

5

Image Rotation

If you have set paper in the standardtray K, incoming fax messages willbe rotated automatically to fit ontothe paper.

Note❒ You can choose to have received

messages printed from a specifiedtray. See p.147 “Reception Set-tings”.

Combine Two Originals

When two messages of the same sizeand orientation are received consecu-tively, they are printed on a singlesheet when you turn this function on.This can help you economize on pa-per.

• Two A5K messages are printedside by side on a sheet of A4L.

• Two B5 JISK messages are printedside by side on a sheet of B4 JISL.

• Two A4K messages are printedside by side on a sheet of A3L.

• Two 81/2"×51/2"K messages areprinted side by side on a sheet of81/2"×11"L.

• Two 81/2"×11"K messages areprinted side by side on a sheet of11"×17"L.

Limitation❒ This function does not work with

messages larger than A5K, B5JISK, A4K, 81/2" × 11"K or 81/2"× 51/2"K. When A5K, B5 JISK,A4K, 81/2" × 11"K or 81/2" ×51/2"K size paper is loaded in themachine, each page of the receivedmessage is printed on a singlesheet.

❒ If paper matching the size and ori-entation of a received document isunavailable, Combine Two Origi-nals is not possible.

❒ When Combine Two Originals and2 Sided Print are selected at thesame time, 2 Sided Print takes pri-ority and Combine Two Originalsis canceled.

Note❒ You can turn this function on or off

with the User Parameters. Seep.166 “User Parameters” (switch10, bit 1).

❒ This function uses Memory Recep-tion.

JupterC2_Fax_EN-F_FM.book Page 99 Monday, November 29, 2004 3:48 PM

Page 110: b 7128511

Reception Features

100

5

Page Separation and Length Reduction

When the size of a received messageis longer than the paper loaded in themachine, each page of the messagecan be split and printed on severalsheets, or reduced and printed on asingle sheet. For example, this func-tion splits the message if the messagelength is 20mm (0.79") or longer thanthe paper used. The message is re-duced if it is less than 20mm (0.79").When a message is split, an asterisk(*) is inserted at the split position andabout 10mm (0.39") of the split area isduplicated on the top of the secondsheet.

Note❒ Your service representative can

customize this function with thefollowing settings:• Reduction• Print split mark• Overprinting• Overprinting length• Guideline for split

❒ You can adjust the overprintingand reduction lengths within thefollowing ranges:• Overprinting length: 4mm (0.16"),

10mm (0.39"), 15mm (0.59")

• Guideline for split: 5-155mm(5mm steps)/0.2"-6.1" (0.2"steps)

Reverse Order Printing

Normally, received pages are printedand stacked on the tray in the orderthey are received. If you turn thisfunction on, the machine will startprinting the message from the lastpage received.

Note❒ You can turn this function on or off

using Reception Settings. See p.147“Reception Settings”.

❒ When this function is on, the firstpage will be printed last.

❒ This function uses Memory Recep-tion.

JupterC2_Fax_EN-F_FM.book Page 100 Monday, November 29, 2004 3:48 PM

Page 111: b 7128511

Printing Options

101

5

Page Reduction

If you receive a message that is longerthan the paper in the tray, the ma-chine usually prints it on two pages. Ifyou turn this function on, the ma-chine reduces the width and length ofthe received image so that it will fit onone page. If A4L paper is loaded anda message of B4 JISL size is received,the machine will reduce the messageto a single A4L sheet.

Note❒ You can turn this function on or off

with the User Parameters. Seep.166 “User Parameters” (switch10, bit 3).

❒ When this function is used, theprinting quality may not be asgood as usual.

Reference p.100 “Page Separation andLength Reduction”

TSI Print (Transmitting Subscriber Identification Print)

Usually the sender's Fax Header isprinted on received messages. If thesender has not programmed their FaxHeader , you will not be able to iden-tify them. However, if you turn thisfunction on, the sender's Own Nameor Own Fax Number is printed in-stead so you can find out where themessage came from. When you re-ceive an Internet Fax document, the e-mail address of the sender is printed.

Referencep.75 “Initial Settings and Adjust-ments”, Facsimile Reference <BasicFeatures>

Note❒ You can turn this function on or off

in the User Parameters. See p.166“User Parameters” (switch 02, bit3).

When There Is No Paper of the Correct Size

If there is no paper in your machinethat matches the size of a receivedmessage, the machine will choose apaper size based on the paper avail-able. For example, if your machinehas 81/2"×11"K and A3L loaded andyou receive a A4L size message,check the A4L column of the follow-ing table. The paper size at the top hashighest priority. In this case, since81/2"×11"K is given a higher prioritythan A3L, the message is printed on81/2"×11"K. If only B5 JISL is loaded and you re-ceive an A3L message, the receivedmessage is stored in memory and notprinted.

JupterC2_Fax_EN-F_FM.book Page 101 Monday, November 29, 2004 3:48 PM

Page 112: b 7128511

Reception Features

102

5

❖❖❖❖ Priority Table

• KK and LL indicate that themessage is split over two pages ofpaper with the orientation and sizeshown.

Note❒ Paper placed in the bypass tray is

not usually selected for printing areceived message. However, youcan use this tray if you select thebypass tray as the main paper trayusing Reception with SpecifiedSenders. See p.171 “Special Send-ers to Treat Differently”.

❒ Widths that this machine can re-ceive are A4, B4 JIS, and A3. Anymessages narrower than A4 aresent as A4 width with the lengthunchanged.

❒ The paper size used to print a re-ceived message may be differentfrom the size of the sent original.

❒ If you specify a receiving tray withthe setting priority under SystemSettings, the messages may be re-ceived in a different order by set-ting the priority table. The prioritytray may be used only when thedocument received is the same sizeas the priority tray.

Referencep.99 “Image Rotation”p.100 “Page Separat ion andLength Reduction”p.101 “Page Reduction”“Tray Paper Settings”, General Set-tings Guide

Setting priority trays

With the same size of paper loadedinto multiple trays, you can make themachine use one tray for one functionand another tray for another function.For example, you may load white A4paper into tray 1 to use when makingcopies, and yellow A4 paper into tray2 to use when printing received faxes.You can then easily identify for whichpurpose paper has been output. Youcan perform this setting using SystemSettings. See “Tray Paper Settings”,General Settings Guide.

Note❒ When a different size of document

from the priority tray is received,the tray containing the same size ofpaper as the received document isused.

Page reduction Disabled

Reduction in Sub-scan Direction

Enabled

Page Separation Threshold

20mm (0.79")

Width or Length Pri-ority

Width

JupterC2_Fax_EN-F_FM.book Page 102 Monday, November 29, 2004 3:48 PM

Page 113: b 7128511

Printing Options

103

5

Just size printing

If you enable this function, receiveddocuments are printed on the sheetthat has highest priority. See p.102“Priority Table”. This function is en-abled with User Parameters. Seep.166 “User Parameters” (switch 05,bit 5). If the paper tray is not stocked withpaper of a suitable size to print a re-ceived document, a message appearson the display prompting you to loadpaper of the required size. When youhave loaded new paper, press [Exit] toprint the document.

Note❒ After pressing [Exit], procedure

varies depending on machine sta-tus when the message occurred.• If any received documents or re-

ports were being printed automat-ically, the printer automaticallycontinues printing from where itleft off.

• If any documents or reportswere being printed manually,the printer does not resumeprinting. Perform the operationfrom the beginning again.

Having Incoming Messages Printed on Paper from the Bypass Tray

You can print messages sent fromSpecified Senders on paper from thebypass tray.Set as follows:• Program a special sender and se-

lect the Bypass Tray for the papertray type. See p.178 “ProgrammingBypass Tray Paper Size” under“Program Special Sender”.

• Turn on the Authorized RX func-tion under the Program SpecialSender function. See p.178 “Pro-gramming Authorized RX andSpecial RX Function”.

Limitation❒ When using this function, printed

sheets cannot be delivered to thefinisher output tray. Even if youspecify the finisher output tray,sheets are delivered to the InternalTray 1 . See “Tray Paper Set-tings:Fax”, General Settings Guide.

Note❒ You can load a maximum of 100

sheets of standard paper in the by-pass tray.

❒ You can use a size of paper notstocked in the paper tray(s) in thebypass tray.

❒ The machine can detect A5L, A4L,A3L, 51/2"×81/2"L, 81/2"×11"L,11"×13"L, 8"×13"L paper sizes.When you load any other size,specify the paper size. However, ifthe specified paper size and size ofpaper set in the bypass tray do notmatch, paper jams may occur, orthe image may be shortened. Seep.178 “Programming Bypass TrayPaper Size”.

JupterC2_Fax_EN-F_FM.book Page 103 Monday, November 29, 2004 3:48 PM

Page 114: b 7128511

Reception Features

104

5

❒ Messages printed on paper smallerthan A4 may be shortened, or splitacross sheets.

❒ Paper longer than 600mm may becreased, not sent, or jam.

❒ Print area depends on optional ex-pansion memory, resolution, andvertical length of originals.

❒ If you use this function, Image Ro-tation and 180-Degree RotatingPrinting are not possible.

JupterC2_Fax_EN-F_FM.book Page 104 Monday, November 29, 2004 3:48 PM

Page 115: b 7128511

Where Incoming Message are Delivered - Output Tray

105

5

Where Incoming Message are Delivered - Output Tray

Specifying Tray for Lines

The optional extra G3 interface unit is re-quired.

You can specify the document feed-ing tray for each port (telephone, In-ternet Fax, IP-Fax). For example, youcan specify documents receivedthrough the G3 -1 port to be fed to the“Internal Tray 1” and documents re-ceived through the G3 -2 port to befed to the “Internal Tray 2”, facilitat-ing separation of files. You can alsoset the machine to output InternetFaxes and ordinary faxes onto differ-ent trays.

Note❒ To use this function, specify the

port and destination using [SpecifyTray for Lines]. See p.147 “ReceptionSettings”.

Tray Shift

The optional finisher is required.

When the optional finisher unit is se-lected for fax output, you can use theTray Shift function whenever a fax orreport is printed.This is useful for separating faxesstacked in the finisher output tray.For example, if the previous incomingfax was output to the left, the next in-coming fax will be output to the rightand vice-versa.

Note❒ You can turn this function on or off

with the User Parameters. Seep.166 “User Parameters” (switch19, bit 0).

JupterC2_Fax_EN-F_FM.book Page 105 Monday, November 29, 2004 3:48 PM

Page 116: b 7128511

Reception Features

106

5

JupterC2_Fax_EN-F_FM.book Page 106 Monday, November 29, 2004 3:48 PM

Page 117: b 7128511

107

6. Fax via Computer

Sending Fax Documents from Computers

Using computers connected to the machine through parallel ports, IEEE 1394 (IPOver 1394) ports, LANs, or wireless LANs you can fax documents, created usingWindows applications, to other fax machines over a telephone line.• To send a fax, simply select [Print] from the Windows application, then select

LAN-Fax as the printer, and then specify a destination.• In addition to sending faxes, LAN-Fax Driver allows this machine to be used

for printing out documents prepared on a computer for proof checking. • To use LAN-Fax Driver, connect this machine to a LAN and make the neces-

sary network settings, and then install LAN-Fax Driver and related utility onyour computer.

Important❒ Errors occurring when the machine is used as a LAN-Fax will not be dis-

played on the computer. Check the help menus using a Web Image Monitor.

ADJ013S

JupterC2_Fax_EN-F_FM.book Page 107 Monday, November 29, 2004 3:48 PM

Page 118: b 7128511

Fax via Computer

108

6

Before Use

To use these features, a LAN-FaxDriver must be installed on your com-puter. Use the LAN-Fax Driver in-cluded on the printer CD-ROM. Youmust also make the required comput-er to fax network settings on the ma-chine, according to the type ofconnection.

ReferenceWhen a personal computer and themachine are connected in parallel: See “System Settings (Parallel Con-nection)”, Printer Reference.When using Ethernet, IEEE 1394(IP over 1394), or IEEE 802.11b(wireless LAN): See “Connection and Setup”, Net-work Guide.

Installing the Software

You need to install LAN-Fax Driveron your computer before using theLAN-Fax functions. LAN-Fax Driveris on the CD-ROM included with theprinter.Address Book and LAN-Fax CoverSheet Editor are installed with LAN-Fax Driver. Address Book helps youedit LAN-Fax transmission destina-tions. LAN-Fax Cover Sheet Editorhelps you edit LAN-Fax cover sheets.

Note❒ The following explanation assumes

that you are familiar with generalWindows procedures and practic-es. If you are not, see the documen-tation that comes with Windowsfor details.

Auto run program

With Windows 95/98/Me, Windows2000/XP, Windows Server 2003 andWindows NT 4.0, the installers forvarious drivers and utilities launchautomatically as Auto Run programswhen you insert the CD-ROM.If your operating system is Windows2000/XP, Windows Server 2003 orWindows NT 4.0, installing a printerdriver using Auto Run requires Ad-ministrator permissions. When youinstall LAN-Fax Driver using AutoRun, log on using an account that hasAdministrator permissions.

Note❒ If the plug and play function starts,

click [Cancel] in the [New HardwareFound], [Device Driver Wizard], or[Found New Hardware Wizard] dialogbox, and then insert the CD-ROM.The [New Hardware Found] or [FoundNew Hardware Wizard] dialog box ap-pears depending on the systemversion of Windows 95/98/Me,Windows 2000/XP, or WindowsServer 2003.

❒ Auto Run might not work auto-matically with certain OS settings.If this is the case, double-click “Set-up.exe”, located on the CD-ROMroot directory.

❒ If you want to cancel Auto Run,hold down the {{{{SHIFT}}}} key (whenyour system is Windows 2000/Win-dows XP or Windows Server 2003,hold down the left the {{{{SHIFT}}}} key)while inserting the CD-ROM. Keepthe {{{{SHIFT}}}} key hold down untilthe computer stops reading theCD-ROM.

❒ Clicking [Cancel] during installa-tion aborts the installation. If youcancel the installation, restart yourcomputer and install the rest of thesoftware or printer driver.

JupterC2_Fax_EN-F_FM.book Page 108 Monday, November 29, 2004 3:48 PM

Page 119: b 7128511

Sending Fax Documents from Computers

109

6

LAN-Fax Driver, Address Book, andLAN-Fax Cover Sheet Editor can beinstalled by Auto Run.

Installing individual applications

PreparationBefore installing the above appli-cations, install SmartDeviceMoni-tor for Client. See “Software andUtilities Included on the CD-ROM”, Printer Reference.

Use the following procedure to installLAN-Fax Driver, Address Book, andLAN-Fax Cover Sheet Editor at onetime.

AAAA Quit all applications currentlyrunning.

BBBB Insert the CD-ROM included withthis machine into the CD-ROMdrive of your computer.

The installer launches automatical-ly, and the language selection win-dow appears.

Note❒ Depending on your operating

system settings, the installermay not launch automatically.If it does not, double-click “SET-UP.EXE” in the CD-ROM rootdirectory to launch the installer.

CCCC Select the interface language ofthe software, and then click [OK].

DDDD Click [LAN-Fax Driver].

The software license agreementwindow appears.

EEEE Read all of the terms and, if youagree, select [I accept the agreement],and then click [Next].

Note❒ If you select [I don't accept the

agreement], you cannot completethe installation.

FFFF Click the [LAN-Fax Driver] checkbox, and then click [Next].

GGGG Confirm that the [Printer Name:<LAN-Fax M6>] check box has been se-lected, and then click [Continue].

Note❒ Select the desired port.

HHHH Click [Finish].The installation completion dialogbox appears.

IIII Click [Finish].

JJJJ Click [Exit].

Applications Stored on the CD-ROM

This section provides informationabout LAN-Fax Driver, Address Book,and LAN-Fax Cover Sheet Editor.

LAN-Fax Driver

This driver allows you to use LAN-Fax functions.

❖❖❖❖ Location of the FileThe following folders are on theCD-ROM:• LAN-Fax Driver for Windows

95/98/MeD RI V E RS L A N -FAXWIN9X_Me

• LAN-Fax Driver for WindowsNT 4.0\DRIVERS\LAN-FAX\NT4

• LAN-Fax Driver for Windows2000/XPDRIVERSLAN-FAXWIN2K_XP

JupterC2_Fax_EN-F_FM.book Page 109 Monday, November 29, 2004 3:48 PM

Page 120: b 7128511

Fax via Computer

110

6

❖❖❖❖ Operating Environment• Computer

PC/AT Compatible• Operating Systems

Microsoft Windows 95/98/MeMicrosoft Windows 2000/XPMicrosoft Windows Server 2003Microsoft Windows NT 4.0

• DisplayVGA 640×480 dots or more

Limitation❒ All operations cannot be guaran-

teed depending on the system en-vironment.

❒ When you use Windows NT,LAN-Fax Driver will not work inan RISC base processor (MIPS Rseries, Alpha AXP, PowerPC) en-vironment.

Note❒ Before beginning installation, exit

all other applications.

Address Book

Address Book helps you edit LAN-Fax transmission destinations.

❖❖❖❖ Operating SystemsMicrosoft Windows 95/98/MeMicrosoft Windows 2000/XPMicrosoft Windows Server 2003Microsoft Windows NT 4.0

LAN-Fax Cover Sheet Editor

LAN-Fax Cover Sheet Editor helpsyou edit LAN-Fax cover sheets.

❖❖❖❖ Operating SystemsMicrosoft Windows 95/98/MeMicrosoft Windows 2000/XPMicrosoft Windows Server 2003Microsoft Windows NT 4.0

Setting LAN-Fax Driver Properties

Note❒ If your operating system is Win-

dows NT 4.0, Windows 2000/XP,or Windows Server 2003, log onusing an account that has Admin-istrator rights.

Setting Print Properties

This section describes how to make set-tings such as paper size or resolution.

AAAA On the [Start] menu, point to [Set-tings], and then click [Printers].

Note❒ With Windows XP Professional

or Windows Server 2003, select[Printers and Faxes] on the [Start]menu.

❒ With Windows XP Home Edi-tion, select [Control Panel] on the[Start] menu. Next select [Print-ers and Other Hardware], and then[Printers and Faxes].

BBBB Select to highlight [LAN-Fax M6],then click [Properties] on the [File]menu.

Note❒ With Windows NT, click [Docu-

mentDefault] on the [File] menu.

CCCC Set the print properties.

When using Windows 95/98/Me

A Click the [Paper] tab.

B Set the properties as shown below.

• Paper size• Orientation• Tray

JupterC2_Fax_EN-F_FM.book Page 110 Monday, November 29, 2004 3:48 PM

Page 121: b 7128511

Sending Fax Documents from Computers

111

6

• Resolution• Gray scale• Printing images of True Type

fonts

When using Windows 2000/XP, Windows Server 2003, or Windows NT 4.0

A Click the [Paper Setting] button.

B Set the properties as shown below.

• Paper size• Orientation• Tray• Resolution

Making Settings for Option Configuration

Make settings for optional units in-stalled in this machine.

Note❒ If the options on this machine are

not configured as instructed, LAN-Fax functions may fail.

❒ When this machine is connected toa network, option configuration isautomatically performed. For de-tails, see LAN-Fax Driver's Help.

AAAA Perform Steps AAAA and BBBB in “SettingPrint Properties”.

BBBB Make settings for the option con-figuration.

When using Windows 95/98/Me

A Click the [Accessories] tab.

When using Windows 2000/XP, Windows Server 2003, or Windows NT 4.0

A Click the [Accessories] tab.

When using a network

A If the settings do not match theinstalled optional units, click[Load from Device].

When not using a network

A Select the check box besidesthe installed optional units.

CCCC Click [OK].

Option configuration settings arecomplete.

DDDD Click [OK].

----[Accessories] tabThe [Accessories] tab contains the fol-lowing items besides option configu-ration items.

❖❖❖❖ Prohibit manual destination entryCheck this option to inhibit directdestination specification.

❖❖❖❖ Enable E-mailCheck this when using InternetFax with the LAN-Fax function.

❖❖❖❖ IP-FaxCheck this option when using IP-Fax, check this option.After checking this option, select aprotocol by clicking an appropri-ate radio button.

ReferenceProtocols are configured under IP-Fax Setting. See p.150 “IP-Fax Set-tings”.

JupterC2_Fax_EN-F_FM.book Page 111 Monday, November 29, 2004 3:48 PM

Page 122: b 7128511

Fax via Computer

112

6

Basic Transmission

This section describes how to send faxdocuments created using Windowsapplications. To send a fax, simply select [Print]from the Windows application, thenselect [LAN-Fax] as the printer, andthen specify a destination in the [LAN-Fax] dialog box.Open the application document youwant to send or create a new docu-ment, and then perform the followingprocedure. For details, see Help.

Limitation❒ When using SmartDeviceMonitor

for Client, you cannot send docu-ments to this machine using morethan one LAN-Fax at the sametime.

AAAA On the [File] menu, click [Print].

BBBB Select [LAN-Fax M6] in [Printer Name].

CCCC Click [OK].The LAN-Fax dialog box appears.

Note❒ The setting method may differ

depending on the applicationyou are using. In all cases, select[LAN-Fax M6] for the printer.

DDDD Specify the destination.Use one of the following proce-dures to specify a destination. Fordetails, see LAN-Fax Driver'sHelp.

Note❒ When user authentication is used

with this machine, click [UserSettings].

❒ You can specify up to 500 desti-nations.

❒ Documents transmitted fromLAN-Fax can be stored in thismachine. The number of thesedocuments that can be stored isas follows:• Without cover sheet

Standard: 400• With cover sheet

Standard: 200

Specifying a destination using a destination list

A Click the [Address Book:] or [FaxNumber] tab.

The [Address Book:] or [Fax Num-ber] dialog box appears.

B Check the [Device Address] (or[Use programmed machine's ad-dress]) checkbox.

C The machine's address is dis-played in the [Device Address]field on the [Address Book:] tab.On the [Fax number:] tab, enterthe registration number of thedestination key.

D Click [Set as Destination].

The entered destination is add-ed and appears in the [List ofDestinations] box.

Note❒ If you add a destination by

mistake, click the wrong des-tination and then click [Deletefrom List].

E To specify more destinations,repeat Steps CCCC and DDDD.

FaxAdEN_Chapter-6 Page 112 Monday, December 20, 2004 11:21 AM

Page 123: b 7128511

Sending Fax Documents from Computers

113

6

Specifying a destination using Address Book

In order to use this method, youneed to register destinations in theaddress list using Address Book.See p.110 “Address Book”.A Click the [Address Book:] tab.

The contents of the [AddressBook:] tab are displayed.

B Select a CSV file containingthe desired destination list,from the drop-down menu.

Note❒ Up to three most recently

used files appear in the drop-down menu. To use a desti-na t ion l i s t tha t d id n otappear, click [Browse], andthen select the file.

C Select [Contact] or [Group] in the[Name:] dropdown menu as thedisplay format.

Note❒ Destination list contents change

as follows, depending on theoption selected:• Contact: Company name,

department name, indi-vidual name, fax number

• Group: Group name❒ If you selected [Group] from

the [Name:] dropdown menu,proceed to Step E.

D Select the type of fax from the[Type:] dropdown menu.

Note❒ Select the fax type as follows:

• Send by standard fax: [Fax]

• Send by Internet Fax: [E-mail]

• Send by IP-Fax: [IP-Fax]

❒ If you selected [Group] fromthe [Format:] dropdownmenu, you cannot select thefax type. Proceed to Step E.

E Click the destination in thedestination list to highlight it,and then click [Set as Destina-tion].The entered destination is add-ed and appears in the [List ofDestinations] box.

Note❒ If you add a destination by

mistake, click the wrong des-tination and then click [Deletefrom List].

F To specify more destinations,repeat Steps BBBB through EEEE.

Specifying a destination by directly entering a fax number, Internet Fax destination, or IP-Fax destination

A Click the [Specify Destination] tab.

The contents of the [Specify Des-tination] tab are displayed.

B Select the type of fax from the[Type:] dropdown menu.

Note❒ Select the fax type as follows:

• Send by standard fax: [Fax]

• Send by Internet Fax: [E-mail]

• Send by IP-Fax: [IP-Fax]

❒ After you select the fax type,a screen corresponding to theselected type appear.

C Specify the destination.

JupterC2_Fax_EN-F_FM.book Page 113 Monday, November 29, 2004 3:48 PM

Page 124: b 7128511

Fax via Computer

114

6

Note❒ Specify the destination de-

pending on the selected faxtype as follows:• When [Fax] is selected: en-

ter the fax number.• When [E-mail] is selected:

enter the e-mail address.• When [IP-Fax] is selected:

enter the IP-Fax destina-tion.

❒ You can enter up to 128 char-acters for the destination.

❒ To enter a pause in the faxnumber, click [Pause]. If youselected [E-mail] or [IP-Fax] inStep B, [Pause] is not avail-able.

Referencep.35 “Entering a Fax Num-ber”, Facsimile Reference <Ba-sic Features>p.36 “Entering an E-mail Ad-dress”, Facsimile Reference<Basic Features>

p.37 “Entering an IP-FaxDestination”, Facsimile Refer-ence <Basic Features>

D Select a line or protocol fromthe [Line:] or [Protocol:] drop-down menu.

Note❒ The [Line:] dropdown menu

is displayed when you select-ed [Fax] in Step B while the[Protocol:] dropdown menu isdisplayed when you selected[IP-Fax] in Step B If you se-lected [E-mail] in Step B, pro-ceed to Step E.

E Click [Set as Destination].

The entered destination is add-ed and displayed in the [List ofDestinations] box.

Note❒ If you have added a wrong

destination by mistake, clickthe destination by clicking it,an then click [Delete from List].

F To specify more destinations,repeat Steps BBBB through EEEE.

EEEE Specify necessary options.

Referencep.114 “Specifying options”.p.116 “Confirming Transmis-sion Results by E-mail”.

FFFF Click [Send].

Note❒ When you click [Send & Print],

the fax is sent to the destinationand your machine prints a copyof the document you send.

Specifying options

You can specify the options listed be-low.For details, see LAN-Fax Driver'sHelp.• Sending at a Specific Time• Print Sender Stamp• Attach Cover Sheet• Two-Sided Printing• Display Preview• Save as File• Document Server

AAAA Click [Send Options].

The [Send Options] window ap-pears.

JupterC2_Fax_EN-F_FM.book Page 114 Monday, November 29, 2004 3:48 PM

Page 125: b 7128511

Sending Fax Documents from Computers

115

6

BBBB Specify the options you want touse.

To send a fax document at a specific time

A Select the [Sending at specifictime] check box, and then spec-ify a transmission time.

B Click [Send].

To print a Sender Stamp

A Select the [Print Fax Header] checkbox.

B Click [Send].

To attach a cover sheet

A Select the [Attach a Cover Sheet]check box to attach a coversheet to the document you aresending.

Note❒ Click [Edit Cover Sheet] to edit

the cover sheet. See p.121“Editing Fax Cover Sheets”.

❒ Click [Send].

To specify two-sided printing

A Select the [2 sided printing] checkbox.

B Click [Print].

To display preview

Selecting the [Preview] check boxallows you to check how the faxdocument will be output at thedestination.A Select the [Preview] check box.

B Click [Print] or [Send & Print].

The [Preview] window appears.

C Click [Next] or [Previous] to checkthe image.

Note❒ To close the [Preview] win-

dow, click [Cancel].❒ To print the preview image,

click [Print].

Saving as Files

You can save the fax document inTIFF format.A Select the [Save as file] check

box.

B Click [Save to...].C Select a folder on the folder tree.

D Select a method of file naming.

Note❒ To enter a file name manual-

ly, select the [Specify file namewhen saving] check box. Tohave the program name thefile, select the [Automaticallycreate a new file] check box.

E Click [OK].

F Click [Save] or [Send & Save].

Note❒ If you select [Automatically cre-

ate a new file], the image file isassigned a name and savedunder the specified folder.

❒ The file name will be RicH-HMMSS.tif (HH: hours, MM:minutes, SS: seconds).

G Enter a file name.

Note❒ You can also change the fold-

er in this step.H Click [Save].

The image file is saved in thespecified folder.

FaxAdEN_Chapter-6 Page 115 Wednesday, January 19, 2005 2:34 PM

Page 126: b 7128511

Fax via Computer

116

6

To store the fax document on the Document Server

A Select the [Send to Document Serv-er] check box, and then enter auser name, file name, and pass-word.

Note❒ If [Hard Disk Unit] is not select-

ed in [Accessories] under[LAN-Fax Driver properties],you cannot select for [Docu-ment Server].

B Click [Send].

----Checking transmission using LAN-Fax Driver

From “SmartDeviceMonitor for Ad-min”, “SmartDeviceMonitor for Cli-ent”, or Web Image Monitor, you cancheck information on files sent usingLAN-Fax Driver.Also, you can save the content of thecommunication management reportin a personal computer as a CSV fileusing [Fax Communication ManagementReport Acquisition] in “SmartDevice-Monitor for Admin”.

ReferenceSee the relevant Help for details.

Note❒ When data is transmitted from the

LAN-Fax Driver via the “SmartDe-viceMonitor for Client” port, the“Data transfer completed” mes-sage appears on the computer'sdisplay, so you can easily ascertainthe communication progress.However, if the volume of commu-nication data from the LAN-Fax tothis machine increases, the mes-sage may appear during the opera-tion, due to the differences inmemory capacity between this ma-chine and “SmartDeviceMonitorfor Client”. For more accurate faxtransmission results, use “Com-munication Result Report”. Seep.81 “Communication Result Re-port (Memory Transmission)”.

Confirming Transmission Results by E-mail

After you are communicating theLAN-Fax mode, this function trans-mits the communication results withthe computer by e-mail.When you have done [Send] or [SendPrint] using the LAN-Fax, and whenthe communiction has been success-ful from the computer to this ma-chine, it transmits an e-mail of thetransmission result. See p.81 “Com-munication Result Report (MemoryTransmission)”.In addition, in case of communicationerror from the computer to this ma-chine, or in case of printing, the LAN-Fax Result E-mail Report is transmit-ted.

JupterC2_Fax_EN-F_FM.book Page 116 Monday, November 29, 2004 3:48 PM

Page 127: b 7128511

Sending Fax Documents from Computers

117

6

Note❒ If there be any insufficient configu-

ration in the e-mail menu on thismachine, or if “Auto Specify Send-er Name” is set to “Off”, the LAN-Fax result notification e-mail willnot be transmitted, and the LAN-Fax Result Report is printed out.See “Setting File Transfer”, Net-work Guide for the e-mail settings,and see p.118 “LAN-Fax Result Re-port” for the LAN-Fax Result Re-port.

AAAA Click the [E-mail Settings] tab.

BBBB Select the [Notify] check box under[E-mail TX results].

CCCC Enter the destination.

When entering the e-mail address directly

A Click the [Specify destinations]radio button.

B Enter the e-mail address in the[Specify destinations] field.

When entering the machine's programmed address

A Click the [Device Address] radiobutton.

B Enter the machine's programmedaddress in the [Device Address]field.

Note❒ This field is unavailable when

the [Specify destinations] is se-lected, and you cannot enterin the text box.

DDDD Click [Send].

JupterC2_Fax_EN-F_FM.book Page 117 Monday, November 29, 2004 3:48 PM

Page 128: b 7128511

Fax via Computer

118

6

LAN-Fax Result Report

In case of being set at the LAN-Fax result e-mail report, if there be any insuffi-cient configuration in the e-mail menu on this machine, or if “Auto Specify Send-er Name” is set to “Off”, the LAN-Fax result notification e-mail will not betransmitted, and the LAN-Fax Result Report is printed out. If the “LAN-Fax Re-sult E-mail Report” of “Sender Settings” in “Transmission Mode” has not beenset at “Yes”, the LAN-Fax Result Report is printed out.

Note❒ Whether or not the LAN-Fax Result Report is printed out, can be configured

at “User Parameters”. See p.166 “User Parameters” (Switch 20, bit 0).❒ When executing [Send] or [Send Print] with the LAN-Fax Driver, and when the

E-mail TX Result Report has not been arrived, the Result Report is printedout. See p.81 “Communication Result Report (Memory Transmission)”

Printing and Saving

You can print documents created us-ing Windows applications. You can also save documents in TIFformat.Open the application document youwant to print or create a new docu-ment, and then perform the followingprocedure. For details, see Help.

Note❒ You can select the time delay when

problems such as paper running-out or paper jams are resolved. Seep.166 “User Parameters” (switch20 , bit 2/3/4/5).

AAAA On the [File] menu, click [Print...].

BBBB Select [LAN-Fax M6] in [Printer Name],and then click [OK]. The [LAN-Fax] dialog box appears.

Note❒ The setting method may differ

depending on the applicationyou are using. In all cases, select[LAN-Fax M6] for the printer.

Printing

A Click [Print] or [Send & Print].

Note❒ You can save the fax image in

a file. See p.115 “Saving asFiles”.

Editing Address Book

You can program and edit destina-tions in the address list using the Ad-dress Book.For details, see Help.

AAAA On the [Start] menu, point to [Pro-grams], [LAN-Fax Utilities], and thenclick [Address Book].

The Address Book display ap-pears.

Note❒ If LAN-Fax Driver has already

started up, click [Edit AddressBook].

BBBB Click [New/Browse...], and then se-lect the CSV file containing theaddress list to be edited.

JupterC2_Fax_EN-F_FM.book Page 118 Monday, November 29, 2004 3:48 PM

Page 129: b 7128511

Sending Fax Documents from Computers

119

6

CCCC Edit an existing destination or pro-gram a new one.

Note❒ You can use files created in CSV

format, as Address Book data.For this purpose, create CSVfiles that conform to a certainformat. For more information,see Help.

❒ To program the contents of theAddress Book of this machine tothe destination list, select the[Device Address] check box, thenenter the destination key's regis-tration number in the [Device Ad-dress] field.

Programming new destinations

A Enter the destination and name.

Note❒ You can enter the name, com-

pany name, departmentname, fax number, e-mail ad-dress, and IP-Fax address.The name and destination(Fax Number, E-mail Ad-dress or IP-Fax Address) can-not be omitted.

❒ For [Line:] under [Fax num-ber:], select the appropriateline type; G3, G3-2, G3-3, G3Dir. Auto, G3 PABX Auto, orPABX.

❒ For [Protocol:] under [IP-Faxaddress:], select [H.323] or[SIP].

B Click [Add]. The destination is added to thedestination list.

Editing programmed destinations

A Select the destination youwant to edit in the list.

The destination should appearin gray.

B Edit the data.C Click [Update].

Deleting programmed destinations

A Select the destination youwant to edit in the list.

The destination should appearin gray.

B Click [Delete].

C Click [Yes].

DDDD Click [Close].

EEEE If you made changes to a destina-tion, a confirmation message ap-pears. To save the changes, click[Yes]. If you do not want to save thechanges and want to quit editing,click [No]. To return to the editing display,click [Cancel].

Note❒ The confirmation dialog box does

not appear when you have notmade any changes after startingAddress Book.

JupterC2_Fax_EN-F_FM.book Page 119 Monday, November 29, 2004 3:48 PM

Page 130: b 7128511

Fax via Computer

120

6

----Using the machine's Address Book data in the destination list of the LAN-Fax

You can save information about faxdestinations registered to this ma-chine in a personal computer as aCSV file using “Address InformationManagement” in “SmartDeviceMoni-tor for Admin”. Saved CSV files canbe inserted into the destination tableof the LAN-Fax Driver by selecting[New/Reference] in Destination TableEditing Tool. Save the file again forthe LAN-Fax Driver.

ReferenceFor details, see “SmartDeviceMon-itor for Admin” Help.

Note❒ When destinations registered in

groups by this machine are insert-ed into Destination Table EditingTool, each person's destination isdetermined according to the fol-lowing order of priority (check be-fore inserting and changing theorder of priority, if necessary): IP-Fax destination → Fax number →Mail address

❒ Depending on the machine type,you may not be able to use the ma-chine when it is updating the Ad-d r es s B o o k u s i ng C SV f i l e s(retrieved using SmartDeviceMon-itor for Admin) that contain usercodes.

----Managing facsimile functions using SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin

You can check information about thismachine's fax functions using a com-puter and save files on a computer us-ing SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin.You can use SmartDeviceMonitor forAdmin to do the following:• Check information about fax desti-

nations registered to this machineusing “Address Information Man-agement”.

• Save information about fax desti-nations registered to this machinein a personal computer as a CSVfile using “Address InformationManagement”. Saved CSV filescan be inserted into the destinationlist of the LAN-Fax Driver usingthe Destination List Editing Tool.

Note❒ For details about SmartDevice-

Monitor for Admin and its installa-tion, see Printer Reference.

❒ For details, see Network Guide andSmartDeviceMonitor for AdminHelp.

JupterC2_Fax_EN-F_FM.book Page 120 Monday, November 29, 2004 3:48 PM

Page 131: b 7128511

Sending Fax Documents from Computers

121

6

Editing Fax Cover Sheets

LAN-Fax Cover Sheet Editor allowsyou to edit the format for fax coversheets. It is necessary to create a coversheet file before attaching a coversheet to fax messages using LAN-FaxDriver.

Creating a cover sheet

Use the following procedure to createa fax cover sheet.You can edit the items below usingLAN-Fax Cover Sheet Editor.• Company name as destination info.• Department name as destination info.• Person name as destination info.• Title of address as destination info.• Company name as sender info.• Department name as sender info.• Person name as sender info.• Telephone number as sender info.• Fax number as sender info.• Date• Message

Note❒ Cover sheet data is stored in its

own format (using “fcp” as its ex-tension)

AAAA On the [Start] menu, point to [Pro-grams], [LAN-Fax Utilities], and thenclick [LAN-Fax Cover Sheet Editor].

The dialog box of LAN-Fax CoverSheet Editor appears.

BBBB Edit the cover sheet.

Note❒ For details about operations, see

Help.

CCCC Click [Save as...] on the [File] menu.

DDDD Select a folder, and then enter afile name.

EEEE Click [Save].

Attaching a created cover sheet

Use the following procedure to attacha created cover sheet file to a fax mes-sage.

AAAA On the [File] menu, click [Print...].

BBBB Select “LAN-Fax M6” in “PrinterName”, and then click [OK].

The [LAN-Fax] dialog box appears.

CCCC Click [Edit Cover Sheet].

The [Edit Cover Sheet] dialog boxappears.

DDDD Select a cover sheet file from thedrop-down list or after clicking[Browse...] in [Select Cover Sheet].

Note❒ The selection made in [Select

Cover Sheet] is not canceled un-less you select another file. Ifyou want to change only desti-nation information, skip thisstep and proceed to step E.

EEEE Select the type of informationfrom [To:].

Note❒ You can select [Use Address Book],

[To Whom It May Concern], [EditNames], or [None]. Selecting [EditNames] allows you to enter com-pany, department, and personnames.

FFFF To print the date, select the [With aDate] check box.

JupterC2_Fax_EN-F_FM.book Page 121 Monday, November 29, 2004 3:48 PM

Page 132: b 7128511

Fax via Computer

122

6

GGGG Enter the sender information.

Note❒ You can enter company, depart-

ment, and person names, andtelephone and fax numbers.

❒ To add a message, select the[With a Message] check box, andthen enter a message.

HHHH Click [OK].

IIII Specify a destination.

JJJJ Click the [Send Options] tab andthen select the [Attach a CoverSheet] check box.

KKKK Click [Send].

LAN-Fax Operation Messages

Message Causes and Solutions

Cannot access the print-er. Click [retry] to send the data again.

Check the network connection.

Check that the power is turned on.

The number of entries in Destinations exceed the limits. Up to 500 entries can be entered.

The number of destinations specified exceeds the maxi-mum possible. The maximum number of destinations that can be specified at one time is 500.

“LAN-Fax” has already been launched. Cannot launch it again.

The [LAN-Fax] dialog box is already open. Quit LAN-Fax once, and then start it up again.

Failed to allocate memory. Available memory on the computer is insufficient. Quit applications currently not in use.

JupterC2_Fax_EN-F_FM.book Page 122 Monday, November 29, 2004 3:48 PM

Page 133: b 7128511

Viewing Fax Information Using a Web Browser

123

6

Viewing Fax Information Using a Web Browser

You can view received fax messagesand their lists or print these messagesusing a Web Image Monitor on a net-work computer.

Note❒ You need to select “Store” as the

“Reception File Setting” in the Fac-simile Features menu. See p.193“Storing or Printing Received Doc-uments”.

❒ You can also check and managethe documents using DeskTop-Binder Lite. See p.139 “ManagingDocuments Saved in the Docu-ment Server from a Computer”.

Reference“Using Web Image Monitor”, Net-work Guide

Viewing, Printing, and Deleting Received Fax Messages Using a Web Image Monitor

Use the following procedure to viewand/or print received fax messagesusing a Web Image Monitor.

Viewing received fax messages using a Web browser

AAAA Start a Web browser.

BBBB Enter the machine's IP address inthe [Address] field.

CCCC Click [Fax Received File] in the leftpane.

With a user code (stored reception file) programmed

A If you have programmed a usercode, enter the code, and thenpress [OK].

A list of the received fax mes-sages appears.

Note❒ If the programmed user code

has been deleted using theAddress Book Managementfunction under System Set-tings, a message indicatingincorrect user code entry ap-pears. If this is the case, re-program a user code. Seep.195 “Setting a User forVi e w in g Re c e i ve d a ndStored Documents”.

DDDD Click the Property icon of the de-sired fax message.

Note❒ To view a list of the fax messag-

es, select the thumbnail display,detail display, or icon display.Click [Thumbnails], [Details], or[Icons].

EEEE View the content of the fax mes-sage.

Note❒ To enlarge the preview image,

click [Enlarge Image]. Enlarge-ment cannot be performedwithout Acrobat Reader in-stalled. For more information,see Help on the Web ImageMonitor.

JupterC2_Fax_EN-F_FM.book Page 123 Monday, November 29, 2004 3:48 PM

Page 134: b 7128511

Fax via Computer

124

6

FFFF To download the received fax mes-sage, click [PDF] or [Multi-page TIFF].Clicking [PDF] causes AcrobatReader to be started and the mes-sage to be displayed.Clicking [Multi-page TIFF] causes adownloading confirmation win-dow to appear.

Note❒ The method for downloading

differs depending on the select-ed format. For more informa-tion, see Help on the Web ImageMonitor.

Printing fax information using a Web browser

AAAA Start a Web browser.

BBBB Enter the machine's IP address inthe [Address] field.

CCCC Click [Fax Received File] in the leftpane.

The list of received fax messagesappears.

DDDD Click and select the check box be-side the fax message to be printed.

Note❒ To view a list of the fax messag-

es, select the thumbnail display,detail display, or icon display.Click [Thumbnails], [Details], or[Icons].

EEEE Click [Print].

FFFF Click [Start Print].

Note❒ To cancel printing, press [Can-

cel] before clicking [Start Print].

❒ You can change the printing or-der of selected multiple messag-es. You can also have messagesprinted on both sides of paper.For more information, see Helpon the Web Image Monitor.

GGGG Click [OK].

The display returns to that of step D.

Deleting fax information using a Web browser

AAAA Start a Web browser.

BBBB Enter the machine's IP address inthe [Address] field.

CCCC Click [Fax Received File] in the leftpane.The list of received fax messagesappears.

DDDD Click and check the check box be-side the fax message to be deleted.

Note❒ To view a list of the fax messag-

es, select the thumbnail display,detail display, or icon display.Click [Thumbnails], [Details], or[Icons].

EEEE Click [Delete].

FFFF Click [Delete File].

Note❒ To cancel deletion, press [Can-

cel] before clicking [Delete File]. ❒ After selecting multiple messag-

es, you can also cancel deletionof some of the selected messages.For more information, see Helpon the Web Image Monitor.

GGGG Click [OK].

The display returns to that of step D.

JupterC2_Fax_EN-F_FM.book Page 124 Monday, November 29, 2004 3:48 PM

Page 135: b 7128511

Viewing Fax Information Using a Web Browser

125

6

Programming Destination Information from Web Browser

If the receiving machine is compliantwith T.37 full mode Internet Fax, youcan program the receiver's propertiesfrom Web Image Monitor. You canprogram the following properties:• Compression type• Paper size• Character size

Note❒ For the detailed description, see

Help for Web Image Monitor.❒ When a receiver that is programmed

as full mode in the Address Bookreturns a Reception Confirmatione-mail, the contents of the newlyreceived e-mail overwrite the ex-isting information.

Referencep.55 “T.37 Full Mode”, FacsimileReference <Basic Features>

AAAA Start the Web browser.

BBBB Enter the IP address of the ma-chine you want to monitor after“http://” in the address field.

The top screen is displayed.

CCCC Click [Login], and then enter theAdministrator's name and pass-word.

DDDD Click [Address Book] in the left pane.

The Address Book is displayed.

EEEE Set the Internet Fax data format.

To edit machine properties already programmed

A Click the radio button to theleft of the machine you want tom o d if y , an d th e n c l i c k[Change].

The [Edit User] page appears.B Set the properties for Internet

Fax data format other than themode selection.

Note❒ If you change the mode to

“Simple”, you cannot set ma-chine properties.

C Click [OK] at the upper-right ofthe screen.

The Address Book is displayed.

Note❒ To cancel the setting, click

[Cancel] in the upper-right ofthe screen.

To add new receiver

A Click [Add].

The [Add User] page appears.B Check that [User] is selected in

the dropdown menu.C Enter the registration number,

name, and e-mail address, thenset the necessary properties.

Note❒ You can set the Internet Fax

data format after entering thee-mail address.

D Click [Full] under [Internet Faxdata format:], and set the proper-ties according to the receiver'sproperties.

JupterC2_Fax_EN-F_FM.book Page 125 Monday, November 29, 2004 3:48 PM

Page 136: b 7128511

Fax via Computer

126

6

Note❒ If you change the mode to

“Simple”, you cannot set ma-chine properties.

E Click [OK] in the upper-right ofthe screen.

The Address Book is displayed.

Note❒ To cancel the setting, click

[Cancel] in the upper-right ofthe screen.

FFFF Close the Web browser.

JupterC2_Fax_EN-F_FM.book Page 126 Monday, November 29, 2004 3:48 PM

Page 137: b 7128511

Delivering Files Received by Fax

127

6

Delivering Files Received by Fax

ScanRouter EX Professional (sold separately) is also required as a delivery server. Desk-TopBinder Lite or DeskTopBinder Professional (sold separately) software must be in-stalled on your computer.

Messages received by the machinecan be viewed on or downloaded to acomputer with the network deliveryserver, ScanRouter EX Professional.This is a useful function, enabling youto view and store messages on yourcomputer without printing them.Using the delivery server, you caneliminate the task of retrieving anddelivering messages.

❖❖❖❖ FunctionsDelivery server provides the fol-lowing functions:• Use the delivery server to asso-

ciate incoming messages (Con-fidential ID, SUB Code, OwnName, and Own Fax Number)with receivers, so messages aredelivered to the intended re-ceivers.

• You can select the delivery meth-od for incoming messages: “Savein the delivery server inbox”,“Send as an e-mail attachment”,or “Save in the designated PCfolder”. Incoming messageswith no Confidential ID, IDOverride Confidential Trans-mission, SUB Code, Own Name,or Own Fax Number are savedin the delivery server inbox. Youcan also set so that the receivedmessages are stored in the spec-ified delivery server inbox ac-cording to the used line forreception.

• You can check or download re-ceived messages stored in thedelivery server inbox usingDeskTopBinder ProfessionalLite or DeskTopBinder Profes-sional.

Limitation❒ Confidential messages are also

forwarded to the deliveryserver.

Note❒ To view or download mes-

sages stored in the deliveryserver inbox, you need to in-stall the separately soldDeskTopBinder on yourcomputer.

❒ To send received messages toyour computer as e-mail at-tachments, you need to havea ScanRouter EX Profession-al-compatible e-mail pro-gram on your computer.

❒ To create a network using thedelivery server, settingsmust be specified in the UserTools of the machine. Set-tings must also be specifiedon the delivery server. See“File Transfer”, General Set-tings Guide.

❒ See ScanRouter EX Profes-sional Help or instructionsfor more information on thedelivery server (ScanRouterEX Professional).

❒ For information about Desk-TopBinder, see DeskTop-Binder's manual and Help.

JupterC2_Fax_EN-F_FM.book Page 127 Monday, November 29, 2004 3:48 PM

Page 138: b 7128511

Fax via Computer

128

6

JupterC2_Fax_EN-F_FM.book Page 128 Monday, November 29, 2004 3:48 PM

Page 139: b 7128511

129

7. Simplifying the Operation

Programs

If you regularly send messages to aparticular destination or transmit us-ing the same functions, you can saverepetitive keypad operations by reg-istering this information in a Key-stroke Program.

Registering and Changing Keystroke Programs

Keystroke Programs can be recalledby just pressing a Quick Dial key. Thefollowing procedure can be used toprogram a new Keystroke Program oroverwrite an old one.You can register the following itemsin Keystroke Programs:• Memory Transmission, Internet Fax

Transmission, Immediate Trans-mission, destinations (up to 500numbers), character size, originaltype, line selection (only when adestination is specified using num-ber keys), Complete Stamp, time-specified transmission, confiden-tial transmission, automatic thick-ness, manual thickness, scan size,different-size original, file attach-ment, specification of two-pagespread original, delivery-limit-specified transmission, pollingtransmission, polling reception, re-lay request transmission, two-sid-ed original transmission, textinput, reception confirmation set-tings, BCC transmission settings,protocol selection, each optionalsetting's function.

• Program name (up to 20 characters)

Limitation❒ You cannot register the following

using program No.1:• Any destination• Store File• Polling Transmission• Sender Settings• Specifying a stored file• Enter Subject of E-mail Options

Note❒ The maximum number of pro-

grams you can register is 100.❒ Use the same procedure to register

and change programs. In step E,select the program number youwant to change.

❒ The method of registering or chang-ing programs for the copy functionis different from that of the faxfunction.

AAAA Prepare for registering the program.

Note❒ The procedure for program-

ming differs depending on theitems you want to register.

❒ Press the {{{{Clear Modes}}}} key tocancel programming.

Example of registering a program using Send Later with the fax number “0123456789”

A Press {{{{0}}}}, {{{{1}}}}, {{{{2}}}}, {{{{3}}}}, {{{{4}}}}, {{{{5}}}},{{{{6}}}}, {{{{7}}}}, {{{{8}}}}, {{{{9}}}} using thenumber keys.

JupterC2_Fax_EN-F_FM.book Page 129 Monday, November 29, 2004 3:48 PM

Page 140: b 7128511

Simplifying the Operation

130

7

B Perform the Send Later settingtill the procedure of pressing[OK] to return to the standbymode.

Referencep.3 “Sending at a SpecificTime (Send Later)”

BBBB Make sure that the machine is infacsimile mode and the standbydisplay is shown.

Note❒ If the standby display is not

shown, press the {{{{Facsimile}}}} key.

CCCC Press the {{{{Program}}}} key.

DDDD Make sure that [Register] is select-ed.

EEEE Select a program number in which“*Not Stored” is shown.

Note❒ If you make a mistake, press

[Cancel] and select a programnumber again.

❒ When you change a KeystrokeProgram, press [Register] afterpressing the program numberyou want to change. If youmake a mistake, press [Do notRegister] and return to step E.

FFFF Enter the program name, and thenpress [OK].

The standby display appears.

Note❒ If you make a mistake, press

[Backspace] or [Delete All], andthen try again.

❒ You should register the pro-gram name.

❒ To cancel a programmed pro-gram, press [Cancel]. The dis-play returns to that of step E.

Reference“Entering Text”, General Set-tings Guide

Registering a priority function using a program

You can select whether or not thefunction registered in program No. 1will be set after the power is turnedon or the {{{{Clear Modes}}}} key is pressed.After registering a function in pro-gram No. 1, select [Program No.1] for[Change Initial Mode] on the FacsimileFeatures menu. See p.144 “GeneralSettings/Adjustment”.

Limitation❒ You cannot register the following

using program No.1:• Any destination• Store File• Polling Transmission• Sender Settings• Specifying a stored file• Enter Subject of E-mail Options

ZLFS310N

FaxAdEN_Chapter-7 Page 130 Tuesday, December 28, 2004 6:45 PM

Page 141: b 7128511

Programs

131

7

Changing a program name

AAAA Make sure that the machine is infacsimile mode and the standbydisplay is shown.

Note❒ If the standby display is not

shown, press the {{{{Facsimile}}}}key.

BBBB Press the {{{{Program}}}} key.

CCCC Press [Change Name].

DDDD Select the program number of thename you want to change.

EEEE Enter a new program name, andthen press [OK].

Note❒ Press [Cancel] to cancel the change,

and proceed to step F.

FFFF Press [Exit].The standby display appears.

Deleting a Program

AAAA Make sure that the machine is infacsimile mode and the standbydisplay is shown.

Note❒ If the standby display is not

shown, press the {{{{Facsimile}}}}key.

BBBB Press the {{{{Program}}}} key.

CCCC Press [Delete].

DDDD Select the program number youwant to delete.

EEEE Press [Yes].

Note❒ Press [No] not to delete the pro-

gram. The display returns tothat of step C.

FFFF Press [Exit].

The standby display appears.

ZLFS310NZLFS310N

JupterC2_Fax_EN-F_FM.book Page 131 Monday, November 29, 2004 3:48 PM

Page 142: b 7128511

Simplifying the Operation

132

7

Using a Program

Note❒ Using the program causes the pre-

vious settings to be cleared.❒ If you have no programmed desti-

nations or scan settings as pro-grams, select the program number,and then enter the fax number ofthe destination and select the scansettings you require.

AAAA Make sure that the machine is infacsimile mode and the standbydisplay is shown.

Note❒ If the standby display is not

shown, press the {{{{Facsimile}}}}key.

BBBB Place the original.

CCCC Press the {{{{Program}}}} key.

DDDD Confirm that [Recall] is selected,and press the registered programNo.

The standby display appears.Then, the programmed fax num-ber is shown. Transmission Modeis selected.

EEEE Press the {{{{Start}}}} key.

The fax number and specified timeare shown on the display, and themachine starts to scan the original.Transmission starts at the specifiedtime.

ZLFS310N

JupterC2_Fax_EN-F_FM.book Page 132 Monday, November 29, 2004 3:48 PM

Page 143: b 7128511

Using the Document Server

133

7

Using the Document Server

The Document Server can store docu-ments from various applications.The documents that are stored usingthe facsimile function are available totransmit by facsimile.Storing in the Document Server en-ables the following:• Once stored, a document can be

sent out as many times as youwant, just by selecting it.

• Storing a document does not usefacsimile memory.

You can send and print multiplestored documents as a single docu-ment, and also send them withscanned originals at the same time.Follow the instructions under [SelectStored File] in [Sub TX Mode] whensending or printing stored docu-ments. See p.67 “Sending a StoredFile”.

Reference“What You Can Do with This Ma-chine”, General Settings Guide

Important❒ Data stored in the machine might

be lost if some kind of failure oc-curs. The manufacturer shall notbe responsible for any damage thatmight result from the loss of data.

Note❒ Stored documents are not deleted

even when there is a power failure,or the main power switch is turnedoff.

❒ You can specify whether or not themachine automatically deletesdocuments from the DocumentServer after a certain number ofdays. The delete function is pre-configured with the software andautomatically deletes any storeddocument that is more than threedays (72 hours) old. You canchange the setting with “Auto De-lete File”under “System Settings” .See “Administrator Tools — AutoDelete File”, General Settings Guide.

❒ You can store approximately 9,000pages (ITU-T No.4 chart) in theDocument Server, using the copy,facsimile, printer, and scannerfunctions.

❒ The Document Server has a memo-ry capacity of 2,000 documentsmaximum.

❒ You can store up to 1,000 pages perdocument.

❒ You cannot check received andstored documents through theDocument Server. See p.34 “Print-ing Received and Stored Docu-ments”.

JupterC2_Fax_EN-F_FM.book Page 133 Monday, November 29, 2004 3:48 PM

Page 144: b 7128511

Simplifying the Operation

134

7

Storing a Document

You can store and send a document atthe same time. You can also just storea document.

❖❖❖❖ File namesScanned documents are automati-c a l ly as s ig n ed n a m e s l i ke“FAX0001” or “FAX0002”. Seep.135 “Setting a file name”.

❖❖❖❖ User NamesYou can set this function if neces-sary to know who and what de-partments stored documents in themachine. See p.135 “Programminga user name”.

❖❖❖❖ PasswordYou can set this function so as notto send to unspecified people. Seep.135 “Setting a password”.

Note❒ You can change file names and

user names. See p.136 “ChangingInformat ion of Stored Docu-ments”.

AAAA Make sure that the machine is infacsimile mode and the standbydisplay is shown.

If the standby display is notshown, press the {{{{Facsimile}}}} key.

BBBB Place the original, and then selectthe scan settings you require.

Referencep.13 “Placing Originals”, Fac-simile Reference <Basic Features>

CCCC Press [Stored File].

DDDD Select [Store & Transmit] or [Store only].

Select [Store & Transmit] to senddocuments after they are stored.Select [Store only] to store docu-ments.

Note❒ When [Store only] is selected,

“pppppppppp” isshown.

EEEE Press [File Info. Setting], and thenset the user name, file name, andpassword as necessary.

JupterC2_Fax_EN-F_FM.book Page 134 Monday, November 29, 2004 3:48 PM

Page 145: b 7128511

Using the Document Server

135

7

Note❒ If you are not setting a user

name, file name, or password,proceed to step F.

❒ You cannot change multipledocuments at once.

Programming a user name

Note❒ Set a user name from those pro-

grammed in the user code. Usercode is programmed in SystemSettings. See “Registering aNew User Code”, General Set-tings Guide.

A Press [User Name].

B Press the user name to be pro-grammed, and then press [OK].

Note❒ Press the title key to switch

between titles.

❒ To set an non-programmeduser name, press [Non-pro-grammed Name], and then en-ter the name. User namesentered by pressing [Non-pro-grammed Name] are not pro-grammed into the user code.

Reference“Entering Text”, General Set-tings Guide

C Press [OK].

Setting a file name

A Press [File Name].

B Enter the file name, and thenpress [OK].

Reference“Entering Text”, General Set-tings Guide

C Press [OK].

Setting a password

A Press [Password].

JupterC2_Fax_EN-F_FM.book Page 135 Monday, November 29, 2004 3:48 PM

Page 146: b 7128511

Simplifying the Operation

136

7

B Enter a password using thenumber keys, and then press[####].

Note❒ If you make a mistake, press

[Clear] or the {{{{Clear/Stop}}}} keybefore pressing [OK], andthen reenter your password.

❒ You can enter up to four toeight digits.

C Enter the password again, andthen press [####].

D Press [OK].

Note❒ Press [Change] to enter a dif-

ferent password.E Press [OK].

FFFF Press [OK].

GGGG If you have selected [Store & Trans-mit], specify the receiver.

Note❒ If you have selected [Store only],

proceed to step H.

HHHH Press the {{{{Start}}}} key.

Changing Information of Stored Documents

You can change the file name, username, and password of stored docu-ments.To change a stored document, deletethe document you no longer need,and then reprogram the new docu-ment. See p.138 “Deleting a StoredDocument”.

Note❒ You can program one of the Quick

Operation keys with operations forthis function. Using the key allowsyou to omit steps A. See p.144“General Settings/Adjustment”.

AAAA Press [Sub TX Mode].

BBBB Select [Select Stored File].

CCCC Select [Manage / Delete File], andthen press the document to bechanged.

JupterC2_Fax_EN-F_FM.book Page 136 Monday, November 29, 2004 3:48 PM

Page 147: b 7128511

Using the Document Server

137

7

DDDD If you select a document for whicha password is set, enter the pass-word, and then press [OK].

When a selected file does not havea password, proceed to step E.

EEEE Change the desired informationof the stored document.

Changing a user name

A Press [Change User Name].B Press [Clear].

The user name is deleted.

C Enter the new user name, andthen press [OK].

Note❒ Press the title keys to switch

between titles.

❒ To set a non-programmed username, press [Non-programmedName], and then enter thename.

❒ User names entered by press-ing [Non-programmed Name]are not programmed into theuser code.

Reference“Entering Text”, General Set-tings Guide

Changing the file name

A Press [Change File Name].B Press [Backspace] or [Delete All],

and then re-enter the file name.

Reference“Entering Text” General Set-tings Guide

C Press [OK].

Changing the password

A Press [Change Password].

B Press upper [Change].

JupterC2_Fax_EN-F_FM.book Page 137 Monday, November 29, 2004 3:48 PM

Page 148: b 7128511

Simplifying the Operation

138

7

C Enter a new password usingthe number keys, and thenpress [####].

D Press lower [Change].

E Enter the password again, andthen press [####].

F Press [OK].

FFFF Press [Exit].

GGGG Press [OK].The standby display appears.

Deleting a Stored Document

Use this function to delete stored doc-uments.

Note❒ You can program one of the Quick

Operation keys with operations forthis function. Using the key allowsyou to omit steps A. See p.144“General Settings/Adjustment”.

AAAA Press [Sub TX Mode].

BBBB Press [Select Stored File].

CCCC Press [Manage / Delete File].

DDDD Select the document you want todelete.

Note❒ You can also delete multiple

documents at once.

With a programmed password

A Enter a password using the num-ber keys, and then press [OK].

EEEE Press [Delete File].

FFFF Press [Delete].

Note❒ If you do not want to delete the

document, press [Do not Delete].

GGGG Press [Exit].

JupterC2_Fax_EN-F_FM.book Page 138 Monday, November 29, 2004 3:48 PM

Page 149: b 7128511

Using the Document Server

139

7

HHHH Press [OK].

The standby display appears.

Managing Documents Saved in the Document Server from a Computer

Using DeskTopBinder

Fax documents saved in the Docu-ment Server can be viewed and con-trolled from a network computerwith DeskTopBinder installed. The following operations are avail-able using the computer: • Displaying documents (Easy View-

er)• Displaying document properties

(Properties)• Deleting documents (Delete)• Copying documents to a computer

(Copy)• Printing documents (Print from

Document Server)• Exporting documents as files (Ex-

port Document) • Importing documents into a com-

puter (Import Document)For more information, see DeskTop-Binder's manual and Help.

Limitation❒ If you use a link in Auto Document

Link the versions earlier thanDeskTopBinder Lite or Profession-al version 4.0.0.0., set the SNTPServer Address as “0.0.0.0” onWeb Image Monitor. If the addressis not set correctly, documents can-not be properly imported. For de-tails about import settings, seeHelp for Web Image Monitor.

Note❒ When you send a document using

Fax, if the registration number inthe Address Book registered to thedevice is specified, you can sendthe document to a fax numberonly. Documents cannot be senteven if e-mail and IP-Fax address-es are already registered.

Using a Web browser

Fax documents saved in the Docu-ment Server can be viewed using aWeb Image Monitor on a networkcomputer. These fax documents canalso be downloaded to the computer'shard disk. See p.123 “Viewing Fax In-formation Using a Web Browser”.

JupterC2_Fax_EN-F_FM.book Page 139 Monday, November 29, 2004 3:48 PM

Page 150: b 7128511

Simplifying the Operation

140

7

JupterC2_Fax_EN-F_FM.book Page 140 Monday, November 29, 2004 3:48 PM

Page 151: b 7128511

141

8. Facsimile Features

Function List

The User Tools allow you to program your identification, store frequently usednumbers and settings, and customize default settings to meet your needs.The User Tools are grouped by functions so that you can quickly and easily findthe desired User Tool.

❖❖❖❖ General Settings/Adjustment

Description Reference

Default Transmission Mode and scan set-tings. When the power is turned on, settings specified here are selected:

p.144 “General Settings/Adjustment”

• Memory / Immed. Transmission Switch

• Text Size Priority

• Original Type Priority

• Auto Image Density

• Adjust Scan Density

• Select Title

• Change Initial Mode

• Adjust Sound Volume p.83 “Adjusting the Volume”, Facsimile Refer-ence <Basic Features>

• Program Fax Information p.75 “Initial Settings and Adjustments”, Fac-simile Reference <Basic Features>

• Scan End Reset

• TX Stamp Priority

• Line Priority Setting

• Program Economy Time

• On Hook Mode Release Time

• Quick Operation Key

JupterC2_Fax_EN-F_FM.book Page 141 Monday, November 29, 2004 3:48 PM

Page 152: b 7128511

Facsimile Features

142

8

❖❖❖❖ Reception Settings

❖❖❖❖ E-mail Settings

❖❖❖❖ IP-Fax Settings

Description Reference

Allows you to switch the following reception functions on or off:

p.147 “Reception Settings”

• Switch Reception Mode

• Authorized RX p.175 “Authorized RX (Authorized Recep-tion)”

• Forwarding p.175 “Forwarding”

• RX File Print Qty p.176 “Reception File Print Qty”

• 2 Sided Print p.97 “Two-Sided Printing”

• RX Reverse Printing p.100 “Reverse Order Printing”

• Paper Tray p.177 “Paper Tray”

• Specify Tray for Lines p.105 “Specifying Tray for Lines”

• Checkered Mark p.96 “Checkered Mark”

• Center Mark p.96 “Center Mark”

• Print Reception Time p.97 “Reception Time”

Description Reference

• Internet Fax Settings

• Max. E-mail Size

• SMTP RX File Delivery Setttings

p.148 “E-mail Settings”

Description Reference

• Enable H.323

• Enable SIP

• H.323 Settings

• SIP Settings

• Program / Change / Delete Gateway

p.150 “IP-Fax Settings”

JupterC2_Fax_EN-F_FM.book Page 142 Monday, November 29, 2004 3:48 PM

Page 153: b 7128511

Function List

143

8

❖❖❖❖ Administrator Tools

----Displays• Each menu appears in each tab.• You can switch the display by pressing [UUUU Prev.] or [TTTT Next].• The selected item is highlighted.• When you have made all required settings, press [OK]. If [OK] is not pressed,

the new settings might be canceled.• Press [Cancel] to cancel the new settings. The previous display appears.

Description Reference

• Program / Change / Delete Standard Message

• Store / Change / Delete Auto Document

• Program / Change / Delete Scan Size

• Print Journal

• Transmission Page Count

• Forwarding

• Memory Lock RX

• ECM

• Parameter Setting

• Program Special Sender

• Box Setting

• Transfer Report

• Program Confidential ID

• Program Polling ID

• Program Memory Lock ID

• Select Dial / Push Phone

• Reception File Setting

• Stored RX File User Setting

• Menu Protection Settings

p.155 “Administrator Setting”

JupterC2_Fax_EN-F_FM.book Page 143 Monday, November 29, 2004 3:48 PM

Page 154: b 7128511

Facsimile Features

144

8

Accessing User Tools (Facsimile Features)

Customize the facsimile settings ac-cording to the operations to be fre-quently performed.

Note❒ The machine allows you to change

the facsimile defaults in a modethat is not the facsimile mode. Af-ter changing the defaults, selectfacsimile mode again. This sectiondescribes the facsimile defaultsthat the machine allows you to cus-tomize.

❒ Customized facsimile defaults arekept until the defaults are changedagain. The new settings are notcancelled by turning off the mainpower switch or the Operationswitch or pressing the {{{{ClearModes}}}} key.

ReferenceFor the items that can be changedusing System Settings, see “UserTools (System Settings)”, GeneralSettings Guide.

AAAA Press the {{{{User Tools/Counter}}}} key.

The main menu display for defaultsettings appears.

BBBB Press [Facsimile Features].

The menu display for facsimile de-fault settings appears.

CCCC Select the item that you want tochange.

The corresponding setting displayappears.

Referencep.141 “Function List”

DDDD Follow the displayed instructionsto change the default, and thenpress [OK].

Note❒ If you make a mistake, press

[Cancel].

Quitting Default Settings

AAAA After changing the defaults, press[Exit] on the main menu displayfor default settings.The standby display appears.

Note❒ You can also press the {{{{User

Tools/Counter}}}} key to quit themain menu display for defaultsettings.

General Settings/Adjustment

❖❖❖❖ Memory / Immed. Transmission SwitchUse this function to specify theTransmission Mode for documenttransmission.• Memory Transmission• Immediate Transmission

JupterC2_Fax_EN-F_FM.book Page 144 Monday, November 29, 2004 3:48 PM

Page 155: b 7128511

Accessing User Tools (Facsimile Features)

145

8

❖❖❖❖ Text Size PriorityUse this function to specify thecharacter size of your originals forscanning.• Standard• Detail• Super Fine (expansion memory

required)

❖❖❖❖ Original Type PriorityUse this function to specify thetype of originals for scanning.• Text• Text / Photo• Photo

❖❖❖❖ Auto Image DensityUse this function to prioritize auto-matic Image Density for scanningyour originals.• On• Off

❖❖❖❖ Adjust Scan DensityUse this function to specify thescan density of your originals.

❖❖❖❖ Select TitleUse this function for selecting thetitle to be shown on the destinationlist.• Title 1• Title 2• Title 3

❖❖❖❖ Change Initial ModeUse this function to select whethercontents registered in programNo.1 are to be used as the initialsettings after the power is turnedon or the {{{{Clear Modes}}}} key ispressed:• Standard• Program No.1

Note❒ You cannot select Program

No.1 if program No.1 has notbeen programmed with pri-ority functions.

❖❖❖❖ Adjust Sound VolumeUse this function to adjust thesound volume during On HookMode and Immediate Transmis-sion.See p.83 “Adjusting the Volume”,Facsimile Reference <Basic Features>.• Default ID TX• At Transmission• At Reception• At Dialing• At Printing

❖❖❖❖ Program Fax Information See p.75 “Initial Settings and Ad-justments”, Facsimile Reference <Ba-sic Features>.• Fax Header• Own Name• Own Fax Number

❖❖❖❖ Scan End ResetUse this function to return to theinitial settings each time an origi-nal is scanned.• On• Off

❖❖❖❖ TX Stamp PriorityUse this function to press a TXstamp.• On• Off

JupterC2_Fax_EN-F_FM.book Page 145 Monday, November 29, 2004 3:48 PM

Page 156: b 7128511

Facsimile Features

146

8

❖❖❖❖ Line Priority SettingUse this function to specify the lineof usage.

Note❒ The display may differ depend-

ing on the line type you have.

❖❖❖❖ Program Economy TimeUse this function for specifying atime for transmission when callcharges are low. See p.3 “Sendingat a Specific Time (Send Later)”.

Limitation❒ You can program only one Econ-

omy Time.

Note❒ If you make a mistake, press

[Clear] or the {{{{Clear/Stop}}}} key be-fore pressing [OK], and then tryagain.

❖❖❖❖ On Hook Mode Release TimeUse this function to specify a timeto cancel On Hook mode after youtransmit using On Hook dialing. • 1 minute• 3 minutes• 5 minutes• 10 minutes

❖❖❖❖ Quick Operation Key Frequently used functions pro-grammed as Quick Operation keysare shown on the menu immedi-ately after the power is turned on.The Quick Operation keys can beprogrammed with the followingfunctions:• Journal• TX Status Display (Transmis-

sion File Status)• Print Confidential RX File (Print

Confidential Reception)• Print Memory Lock File

• Stored File• Send Later• Auto Document• 2 Sided Original• Closed Network• Polling Transmission (Polling

Transmission)• Polling Reception (Polling Re-

ception)• Fax Header Print• Label Insertion• RX File Status (Reception File

Status)• Forwarding• Transfer Request• Switch RX Mode (Reception

Mode Switch)• Manual E-mail RX

(when the Internet Fax is set toON.)

• TX Status Report (TransmissionStatus Report)

• Sender Settings• E-mail TX Results(E-mail Trans-

mission Results)Up to three functions can be pro-grammed into a Quick Operationkeys.

A Select Quick Operation Keyyou want to program.

B Select the function you want toprogram in the Quick Opera-tion Key .

JupterC2_Fax_EN-F_FM.book Page 146 Monday, November 29, 2004 3:48 PM

Page 157: b 7128511

Accessing User Tools (Facsimile Features)

147

8

Note❒ Functions that appear dimmed

have already been set.

Reception Settings

❖❖❖❖ Switch Reception ModeSpecify the method for receivingfax messages.• Manual Reception• Auto Reception

❖❖❖❖ Authorized RX (Authorized Reception)Specify whether or not unwantedfax messages are to be screenedout.• On• Off

❖❖❖❖ ForwardingSpecify whether or not receivedfax messages are to be forwardedto a programmed receiver.• On• Off

❖❖❖❖ RX File Print Qty (Reception File PrintQuantity)Specify the number of copies to beprinted for each fax message re-ceived.• 1 to 10 set(s)

❖❖❖❖ 2 Sided PrintSpecify whether or not receivedfax messages are to be printed onboth sides of paper.• On• Off

❖❖❖❖ RX Reverse Printing (Reception Re-verse Printing)Specify whether or not receivedfax messages are to be printedfrom the last page received. • On• Off

❖❖❖❖ Paper TrayUse this function to print fax mes-sages received from programmedsenders and fax messages fromother senders, using different pa-per trays. See p.174 “Paper Tray”.Display of tray names may differdepending on the options in-stalled.• Tray 1• Tray 2• Tray 3 (option)• Tray 4 (option)• Auto Select• LCT (option)

❖❖❖❖ Specify Tray for LinesSpecify a paper tray for each line(telephone, Internet Fax, IP-Fax).• On• OffA Select [On] to select a paper tray.

Note❒ If you select [Off], the re-

ceived fax is delivered to adefault tray.

JupterC2_Fax_EN-F_FM.book Page 147 Monday, November 29, 2004 3:48 PM

Page 158: b 7128511

Facsimile Features

148

8

B Select the line type.

C Select a tray to deliver the re-ceived paper onto, and thenpress [OK].

Note❒ If you want to specify anoth-

er line type, repeat from stepB.

❖❖❖❖ Checkered MarkSpecify whether or not a checkeredmark is to be printed on the firstpage of received fax messages.• On• Off

❖❖❖❖ Center MarkSpecify whether or not a centermark is to be printed halfwaydown the left side and at the topcenter of each page received.• On• Off

❖❖❖❖ Print Reception TimeSpecify whether or not receiveddate and time are to be printed atthe bottom of received fax messag-es.• On• Off

E-mail Settings

❖❖❖❖ Internet Fax SettingsYou can select to display ornot. When you want to send an In-ternet Fax, set ON to display theicon.• On• Off

❖❖❖❖ Max. E-mail SizeMake this setting when you wantto limit the size of e-mail messagesthat are transmitted, if receiverslimit e-mail size, or you cannotsend large size e-mail for some rea-son. When this function is set to on,transmission of e-mail that exceedsthe set size is aborted.• On• Off

Note❒ When e-mail exceeds the maxi-

mum file size, an Error Report isoutput, and the e-mail is delet-ed.

❒ Even when e-mail does not ex-ceed the size limit, it may be re-jected if it does not meet therequirements of the server set-tings.

FaxAdEN_Chapter-8 Page 148 Tuesday, December 28, 2004 6:45 PM

Page 159: b 7128511

Accessing User Tools (Facsimile Features)

149

8

A Press [On].

B Enter the maximum e-mail sizeusing the number keys.

Note❒ Maximum e-mail size can be

between 64 and 102400 KB.❒ If you make a mistake, press

[Cancel] or the {{{{Clear/Stop}}}}key, and then enter again.

C Press [OK].

❖❖❖❖ SMTP RX File Delivery Settings (SMTPReception File Delivery Settings)This function is available on sys-tems that allow routing of e-mailreceived via SMTP. See p.93 “Rout-ing E-mail Received via SMTP”.• On• OffWhen an authorized e-mail ad-dress is set, e-mail received fromaddresses that do not match theauthorized address is discarded,and an error message is returnedto the SMTP server. The authorized e-mail address iscompared with the addresses of e-mail originators, as illustrated bythe following examples.

When the authorized e-mail ad-dress is set to “@aaa.abcd.com”: [email protected] - accepted [email protected] - not accepted [email protected] - not accepted

Note❒ No Error Report is output even

when e-mail is discarded. A Press [On].

B Press [Change], and then enterthe sending e-mail address withtransmission permission.

Note❒ If you make a mistake, press

[Backspace] or [Delete All], andthen enter again.

C Press [OK] twice.

JupterC2_Fax_EN-F_FM.book Page 149 Monday, November 29, 2004 3:48 PM

Page 160: b 7128511

Facsimile Features

150

8

IP-Fax Settings

Make settings to use IP-Fax.Set H.323 for the gatekeeper, SIP forSIP server, and gateway for G3 fax ifnecessary. Check the settings of thenetwork to which this machine is con-nected before making settings.

Note❒ The following characters can be

used for registration of the aliastelephone number in H.323 Set-ting. Make sure you enter thesecharacters correctly:• Numbers• Symbols (# and *)

❒ The following characters can beused for registration of the SIPUser Name in SIP Setting. Makesure you enter these characterscorrectly:• Alphanumerical lower and up-

per cases• The 21 symbols in the table be-

low.

❒ Enter the correct IP addresses forthe gatekeeper, SIP server andgateway, which you have been in-formed by the network Adminis-trator, using numbers and a period(“.”).

❖❖❖❖ Enable H.323Specify whether or not H.323 isused for IP-Fax transmission.• On• Off

❖❖❖❖ Enable SIPSpecify whether or not SIP is usedfor IP-Fax transmission.• On• Off

❖❖❖❖ H.323 SettingsSet the IP address and alias tele-phone number of the gatekeeper.

Note❒ If you select “On” using the

User Parameters, you can usethe gatekeeper server. See p.166“User Parameters”(switch 34,bit 0)

A Press [H.323 Settings].

B Press [Change] for each proper-ty.

; ? : & =

+ $ , - _

. ! ~ * #

‘ ( ) % /

@

FaxAdEN_Chapter-8 Page 150 Monday, December 13, 2004 5:34 PM

Page 161: b 7128511

Accessing User Tools (Facsimile Features)

151

8

C Enter the IP address and aliastelephone number and press[OK].The screen returns to that ofStep B.

D Press [OK].

❖❖❖❖ SIP SettingsSet the SIP server IP address andSIP user name.

Note❒ If you select “On” using the

User Parameters, you can usethe SIP server. See p.166 “UserParameters”(switch 34, bit 1)

A Press [SIP Settings].

B Press [Change] for each proper-ty.

Note❒ A proxy server relays call re-

quests and responses.❒ A redirect server processes

request destination inquiries.❒ A registrar server registers

location information of useragents (which correspond totelephones or facsimiles onpublic telephone lines) on anIP network.

C Enter the IP address and SIPuser name, and then press [OK].The screen returns to that ofStep B.

D Press [OK].

❖❖❖❖ Program / Change / Delete GatewayRegister, change, or delete thegateway used for transmission toIP-Fax.• Registering or changing a gate-

wayA Press [Program / Change / Delete

Gateway].

B Check [Program / Change] isselected.

FaxAdEN_Chapter-8 Page 151 Monday, December 13, 2004 5:34 PM

Page 162: b 7128511

Facsimile Features

152

8

C Press a gateway to register.

When registering a new gate-w a y , p r e ss [ * N o t p r o -grammed.].

D Press [Change] for [Prefix].

E Enter the Prefix using thenumber keys, and then press[OK].

Note❒ To change the existing Pre-

fix, press [Clear], and thenenter a new ID number.

❒ For documents sent usinga gateway to G3 Fax, IDnumbers can be used. Ifthe first several digits ofIP-Fax number and thegateway-specific ID num-ber are identical, docu-ments can be transmittedusing the registered digitsof the gateway. For exam-ple, if both 03 and 04 havebeen registered as gatewaynumber while 0312345678is also specified, docu-ments can be transmittedvia a gateway for which 03is used as ID number.

❒ When you wish to use thegateways regardless of theIP-Fax destination num-bers, register only thegateway addresses with-out registering the IDNumbers.

F Select a protocol.

G Press [Change] for GatewayAddress.

FaxAdEN_Chapter-8 Page 152 Monday, December 20, 2004 11:22 AM

Page 163: b 7128511

Accessing User Tools (Facsimile Features)

153

8

H Enter the gateway address,and then press [OK].The screen returns to that ofStep G.

I Press [OK].• Deleting a gateway

A Press [Program / Change / DeleteGateway].

B Press [Delete], and then selecta gateway to delete.

C Press [Delete] on the confir-mation message.

Note❒ If you do not want to de-

lete the gateway you haveselected, press [Do not De-lete].

❒ The screen returns to thatof Step B.

D Press [Exit].

Note❒ To delete another gateway,

repeat steps B and C.

JupterC2_Fax_EN-F_FM.book Page 153 Monday, November 29, 2004 3:48 PM

Page 164: b 7128511

Facsimile Features

154

8

JupterC2_Fax_EN-F_FM.book Page 154 Monday, November 29, 2004 3:48 PM

Page 165: b 7128511

155

9. Administrator Setting

Administrator Tools List

You can program, change, or delete standard messages and auto documents.You can also set the line type for the machine connection, program various IDs(including a Polling ID), fax destinations, and many other items. In addition, youcan check the number of documents transmitted and received.

Function name Description Reference

Program / Change / Delete Standard Message

You can program, change, or delete standard messages printed at the top of the first page of each incoming mes-sage.

p.157 “Programming, Chang-ing, and Deleting Standard Messages”

Store / Change / Delete Auto Document

You can program, change, or delete pages stored as auto documents.

p.158 “Storing, Changing, and Deleting an Auto Document”

Program / Change / Delete Scan Size

You can program, change, or cancel frequently used scan sizes.

p.160 “Programming, Chang-ing and Deleting a Scan Size”

Print Journal Prints a Journal. p.162 “Printing Journal”

Transmission Page Count Checks the transmission and reception, and totals on the display.

p.162 “Counters”

Forwarding Transfers received messages to a programmed receiver (forwarding destination).

p.162 “Forwarding”

Memory Lock RX Switches the Memory Lock to on or off. To use it, program an ID for printing a message received in Memory Lock mode.

p.165 “Memory Lock”

ECM If part of the transmission fails due to a telephone line fault, this function resends the failed part automatically.

p.165 “ECM (Error Correction Mode)”

Parameter Setting Allows you to change and print the function settings to meet your needs.

p.166 “User Parameters”

Program Special Sender By programming particular receivers as Special Sender in advance, you can have Special Senders treated differently.

p.174 “Programming/Chang-ing Special Senders”

JupterC2_Fax_EN-F_FM.book Page 155 Monday, November 29, 2004 3:48 PM

Page 166: b 7128511

Administrator Setting

156

9

Box Setting By using SUB and SEP Codes with these functions, you can send messages to another par-ty's box, and retrieve messag-es stored in boxes.

p.180 “Box Settings”

Transfer Report Before using Transfer Re-quest, you need this Transfer Report setting.

p.190 “Transfer Report”

Program Confidential ID Registers an ID required for Confidential communication.

p.191 “Programming a Confi-dential ID”

Program Polling ID Registers an ID required for Polling communication.

p.192 “Programming a Polling ID”

Program Memory Lock ID Registers an ID required for Memory Lock reception.

p.192 “Programming a Memo-ry Lock ID”

Select Dial / Push Phone Selects a line type when you connect the machine to a G3 analog line.

Note❒ This function is not avail-

able in some areas.

p.193 “Selecting Dial/Push Phone”

Reception File Setting Selects whether received doc-uments are saved on the hard disk to be printed later or printed immediately without being saved.

p.193 “Storing or Printing Re-ceived Documents”

Stored RX File User Setting Set the password to view re-ceived and stored documents using a Web Image Monitor or DeskTopBinder Lite.

p.195 “Setting a User for Viewing Received and Stored Documents”

Menu Protection Settings Set protection so only the Ad-ministrator can change menu settings.

p.196 “Menu Protection Set-tings”

Function name Description Reference

JupterC2_Fax_EN-F_FM.book Page 156 Monday, November 29, 2004 3:48 PM

Page 167: b 7128511

Using Administrator Settings

157

9

Using Administrator Settings

Programming, Changing, and Deleting Standard Messages

Use this function to program stan-dard messages to be printed at the topof the first page of the original. It isuseful for personalizing messagessuch as sending greetings.

Note❒ You can program three standard

messages. You cannot change the“Confidential”, “Urgent”, “Pleasephone”, or “Copy to corres ...”messages.

❒ Use the same procedure to pro-gram and change your messages.

AAAA Press the {{{{User Tools/Counter}}}} key.

BBBB Press [Facsimile Features].

CCCC Press [Administrator Tools].

DDDD Press [Program / Change / Delete Stan-dard Message].

Programming or changing standard messages

A Check [Program / Change] is se-lected.

B Program or change the message.

Select the message you want toprogram or change.

C Enter a new message.

Reference“Entering Text”, General Set-tings Guide

D Press [OK].

Note❒ To program another message,

repeat the procedure fromstep A.

❒ To cancel a registration, press[Cancel].

JupterC2_Fax_EN-F_FM.book Page 157 Monday, November 29, 2004 3:48 PM

Page 168: b 7128511

Administrator Setting

158

9

Deleting Standard Messages

A Press [Delete], and then selectthe message you want to de-lete.

B Press [Delete].

Note❒ To delete another message,

repeat from step A.❒ To cancel a deletion, press

[Do not Delete]. The display re-turns to that of step A.

EEEE Press [Exit].

FFFF Press the {{{{User Tools/Counter}}}} key.

The standby display appears.

Storing, Changing, and Deleting an Auto Document

If you often have to send a particularpage to people (for example, a map, astandard attachment, or a set of in-structions), you can store that page inmemory as an Auto Document. Thissaves rescanning the original everytime you want to send it.Use the following procedure to pro-gram a new Auto Document or over-write an existing one.You can store the following items inan Auto Document:• Originals (6 documents maximum,

only one page per file).

• Scan settings (resolution, originaltype, and image density)

• Irregular scan area• Document name (16 characters

maximum)

Important❒ When about one hour passes after

power of the machine is turned off,all fax messages stored in memoryare lost. If any messages have beenlost for this reason, a Power FailureReport is automatically printedwhen the operation switch isturned on. Use this report to iden-tify lost messages.

AAAA Press the {{{{User Tools/Counter}}}} key.

BBBB Press [Facsimile Features].

CCCC Press [Administrator Tools].

DDDD Press [Store / Change / Delete AutoDocument].

EEEE Select and follow the appropriateprocedure depending on whatyou want to perform.

Note❒ If there are stored files, the file

names are shown.

JupterC2_Fax_EN-F_FM.book Page 158 Monday, November 29, 2004 3:48 PM

Page 169: b 7128511

Using Administrator Settings

159

9

Storing a file

A Check [Program / Change] is se-lected.

B Select [*Not Stored].

C Enter a file name, and then press[OK].

Reference“Entering Text”,General Set-tings Guide

Changing a file

A Check [Program / Change] is se-lected.

B Select the file you want tochange.The “A file is alreadystored. If another file isstored one will be deleted.Is it OK?” message is shown.

C Press [Store].

If you want to cancel storing,press [Do not Store].

Changing only a file name

A Press [Change Name].

B Select the file whose name youwant to change.

C Enter a file name, and thenpress [OK].

Reference“Entering Text”, General Set-tings Guide

Proceed to step H.

FFFF Place the original, and then selectany scan settings you require.

Note❒ You can also specify a scan size.

See p.15 “Setting a Scan Area”,Facsimile Reference <Basic Fea-tures>.

GGGG Press the {{{{Start}}}} key.

The machine starts to scan andcompletes scanning.

Note❒ To cancel scanning, press [Stop

Scanning].

HHHH Press [Exit].

IIII Press the {{{{User Tools/Counter}}}} key.The standby display appears.

Deleting an Auto Document

Note❒ You cannot delete an Auto Docu-

ment waiting to be transmitted.Delete it after the transmission orcancel the transmission, and thendelete the Auto Document.

AAAA Press the {{{{User Tools/Counter}}}} key.

BBBB Press [Facsimile Features].

JupterC2_Fax_EN-F_FM.book Page 159 Monday, November 29, 2004 3:48 PM

Page 170: b 7128511

Administrator Setting

160

9

CCCC Press [Administrator Tools].

DDDD Press [Store / Change / Delete AutoDocument].

EEEE Press [Delete], and then select thefile you want to delete.

FFFF Press [Delete].

Note❒ To cancel deleting, press [Do not

Delete]. The display returns tothat of step E.

GGGG Press [Exit].

HHHH Press the {{{{User Tools/Counter}}}} key.

The standby display appears.

Programming, Changing and Deleting a Scan Size

When you select a scan size to scan anon-standard size original, two cus-tom sizes are available (Program Size1 and Program Size 2). Use these func-tions to program a custom size in ad-vance.To change an existing scan size, justuse the same procedure.

Important❒ When programming or changing a

scan size, we recommend youmake a record of the new size.

Note❒ You can program up to two sizes.❒ You can specify a horizontal length

from 128 to 1,200mm, or from 5.5to 47 inches.

AAAA Press the {{{{User Tools/Counter}}}} key.

BBBB Press [Facsimile Features].

CCCC Press [Administrator Tools].

DDDD Press [Program / Change / Delete ScanSize].

EEEE Select [Program Size 1] or [ProgramSize 2].

FFFF Enter a horizontal size using thenumber keys.

JupterC2_Fax_EN-F_FM.book Page 160 Monday, November 29, 2004 3:48 PM

Page 171: b 7128511

Using Administrator Settings

161

9

Note❒ Each time you press [mm] or

[inch], the units switch between“mm” and “inch”. If you enter alength and change the units bypressing [mm] or [inch], thelength is converted automati-cally according to the unit (frac-tions are rounded off). Forexample, when you enter {{{{2}}}},{{{{2}}}}, and {{{{0}}}} in millimeters andchange to “inch”, the length “8.7inch” is shown on the display. Ifyou press [mm] or [inch] again,“221mm” is displayed.

❒ If you make a mistake, press[Clear] or the {{{{Clear/Stop}}}} key,and then try again.

❒ To cancel a scan size, press [Can-cel].

GGGG Select a vertical size, and thenpress [OK].

Note❒ A displayed vertical size differs

depending on the selected unit.When [mm] is selected, [Auto De-tect], [210 mm (A4)], [257 mm(B4JIS)], [297 mm (A3)], [216 mm (81/2)] , and [279 mm (11)] areshown. When [inch] is selected,[Auto Detect], [8.3 inch (A4)],[10.1inch(B4 JIS)], [11.7 inch (A3)],[8.5 inch], and [11.0 inch] areshown.

❒ To cancel a scan size, press [Can-cel].

HHHH Press [Exit].

IIII Press the {{{{User Tools/Counter}}}} key.

The standby display appears.

Deleting a scan size

AAAA Press the {{{{User Tools/Counter}}}} key.

BBBB Press [Facsimile Features].

CCCC Press [Administrator Tools].

DDDD Press [Program / Change / Delete ScanSize].

EEEE Press [Delete], and then select [Pro-gram Size 1] or [Program Size 2].

FFFF Press [Yes].

Note❒ To cancel deleting, press [No].

The display returns to that ofstep E.

GGGG Press [Exit].

HHHH Press the {{{{User Tools/Counter}}}} key.The standby display appears.

JupterC2_Fax_EN-F_FM.book Page 161 Monday, November 29, 2004 3:48 PM

Page 172: b 7128511

Administrator Setting

162

9

Printing Journal

The Journal allows you to check amaximum of the last 50 communica-tions (receptions & transmissions)performed by the machine. You canprint the Journal using the Informa-tion menu. See p.27 “Printing theJournal”.

Counters

This function allows you to check thetotal number of pages transmittedand received on the display.• Transmissions:

Total number of transmitted pages• Receptions:

Total number of received pages

AAAA Press the {{{{User Tools/Counter}}}} key.

BBBB Press [Facsimile Features].

CCCC Press [Administrator Tools].

DDDD Press [Transmission Page Count].

EEEE After checking the display, press[Exit].

FFFF Press the {{{{User Tools/Counter}}}} key.

The standby display appears.

Forwarding

This function allows you to have mes-sages printed on the machine, andsent to a specified End Receiver.This is useful if, for example, you arevisiting another office and would likea copy of your messages to be sent tothat office.You can also specify a “folder” as theforwarding destination.

PreparationTo use this function, set Forward-ing under Reception Settings to On(enable). See p.147 “Reception Set-tings”.

Limitation❒ The Forwarding function does not

forward messages received withConfidential Reception, MemoryLock, Polling Reception mode, ormessages received by Transfer Re-quest.

❒ You can select end receivers onlyfrom among destinations pro-grammed in the Address Book.You cannot specify programmedtransfer stations as end receivers.

Note❒ A fax number, e-mail address, IP-

Fax destination, and folder can beset as the forwarding destination.

❒ Even when [On] is selected for“Forwarding” in “Reception Set-tings”, if [Off] is selected for the for-w a r di n g de s t i na t i o n i n th i sfunction, only printing is per-formed, not forwarding. See p.147“Reception Settings”.

JupterC2_Fax_EN-F_FM.book Page 162 Monday, November 29, 2004 3:48 PM

Page 173: b 7128511

Using Administrator Settings

163

9

❒ When you wish to change the endreceivers depending on the for-warding destinations, specify theend receivers by the forwardingdestinations, at “Special Senders”.A document received from a for-warding destination who has notbeen specified as the end receiverwill be forwarded to the forward-ing destination that has been spec-ified in this function. See p.171“Special Senders to Treat Differ-ently”

❒ You can specify whether or not toprint forwarded messages. Seep.166 “User Parameters” (switch11, bit 6).

❒ Deleting a destination specified asa forward destination from thedestination table causes the set-tings of the forward destination tobe deleted, so they must be regis-tered again. When a destination ischanged, a message is transmittedto the new destination. If there isno destination of the specifiedtype, you can set to have a certaindestination quoted with priority.See p.166 “User Parameters”(switch 32, bit 0).

❒ You can program one of the QuickOperation keys with operations forthis function. See p.144 “GeneralSettings/Adjustment”.

❒ If you have specified a folder forforwarding, you can specify thefile format used for forwarding.See p.166 “User Parameters”(switch 21, bit 3).

Programming an End Receiver

AAAA Press the {{{{User Tools/Counter}}}} key.

BBBB Press [Facsimile Features].

CCCC Press [Administrator Tools].

DDDD Press [Forwarding].

EEEE Press [On].

Limitation❒ One end receiver can be regis-

tered per a special sender. Toregister two or more end receiv-ers, use Group Destination.However, a maximum of 500parties can be specified in agroup.

Note❒ If there is an End Receiver al-

ready programmed, a receivername is shown. If you want tochange the receiver, press [Re-ceiver] and proceed to step F.

❒ To cancel Forwarding, press[Cancel] and proceed to step H.

JupterC2_Fax_EN-F_FM.book Page 163 Monday, November 29, 2004 3:48 PM

Page 174: b 7128511

Administrator Setting

164

9

FFFF Specify an End Receiver using thedestination list, and then press[OK].

The receiver name is shown to theright of [Receiver].

Note❒ Press the button on the right of

the display to switch the desti-nation between fax number, e-mail address, IP-Fax destina-tion, and folder.

❒ Set a folder destination in SystemInitial Setting/AdministratorSetting/Register/Change/De-lete Address Book. “RegisteringFolders”, General Settings Guide.

❒ If you have specified a folder forforwarding, you can specify thefile format used for forwarding.See p.166 “User Parameters”(switch 21, bit 3).

❒ If you make a mistake, press[Clear] or the {{{{Clear/Stop}}}} key be-fore pressing [OK], and then tryagain.

GGGG Press [OK].

HHHH Press the {{{{User Tools/Counter}}}} key.

The standby display appears.

Quitting the forwarding function

AAAA Press the {{{{User Tools/Counter}}}} key.

BBBB Press [Facsimile Features].

CCCC Press [Administrator Tools].

DDDD Press [Forwarding].

EEEE Press [Off], and then press [OK].

FFFF Press the {{{{User Tools/Counter}}}} key.

The standby display appears.

Forwarding Mark

You can print a Forwarding Mark onthe receiver's messages that havebeen forwarded.The receiver can distinguish betweenforwarded messages and usual recep-tions.

Note❒ You can specify whether or not to

print a Forwarding Mark in theUser Parameters. See p.166 “UserParameters” (switch 02, bit 0).

JupterC2_Fax_EN-F_FM.book Page 164 Monday, November 29, 2004 3:48 PM

Page 175: b 7128511

Using Administrator Settings

165

9

❒ This function is not available whenmemory forwarding is performedto a folder destination.

Memory Lock

When you switch Memory Lock on,received messages are stored in mem-ory and not printed automatically.When a message is received in theMemory Lock mode, the ConfidentialFile (i) indicator blinks. To print thismessage, enter the Memory Lock ID.A user without the ID cannot printthe message. This prevents unautho-rized users from seeing the message.

PreparationTo use Memory Lock, program theMemory Lock ID, and then switchMemory Lock on. See p.192 “Pro-gramming a Memory Lock ID”.

Limitation❒ This function is not available with

Internet Fax.

Note❒ To store incoming documents from

Special Senders only in MemoryLock, program each sender with“Special Senders to Treat Differ-ently”. See p.171 “Special Sendersto Treat Differently”.

AAAA Press the {{{{User Tools/Counter}}}} key.

BBBB Press [Facsimile Features].

CCCC Press [Administrator Tools].

DDDD Press [Memory Lock RX].

EEEE Select [On] or [Off], and then press[OK].

Note❒ To cancel this setting, press

[Cancel]. The display returns tothat of step D.

FFFF Press the {{{{User Tools/Counter}}}} key.The standby display appears.

ECM (Error Correction Mode)

If part of a transmission fails becauseof a line problem, the lost data is auto-matically resent. For this function towork, the other machine must haveECM. You can turn this function on oroff through the following procedure.

Limitation❒ This function is not available with

Internet Fax.

JupterC2_Fax_EN-F_FM.book Page 165 Monday, November 29, 2004 3:48 PM

Page 176: b 7128511

Administrator Setting

166

9

Note❒ If you turn ECM off, you cannot

use the following functions: • JBIG Transmission• Super G3 Communication

AAAA Press the {{{{User Tools/Counter}}}} key.

BBBB Press [Facsimile Features].

CCCC Press [Administrator Tools].

DDDD Press [ECM].

EEEE Select [On] or [Off], and then press[OK].

Note❒ To cancel this setting, press

[Cancel]. The display returns tothat of step D.

FFFF Press the {{{{User Tools/Counter}}}} key.

The standby display appears.

User Parameters

User Parameters allow you to customize various settings to suit your needs.To change function settings, set the User Parameter Switches.

❖❖❖❖ Switches and BitsEach User Parameter has a set of switches, and each of the switches consist ofeight bits, whose values are “0”or “1”. The right most bit is bit 0 and the leftmost is bit 7. You can adjust the settings to match your needs by switching thevalue of bits between “0”and“1”.

Switch 02

0 0 1 1 1 0 1 1

↓ ↓ ↓ ↓ ↓ ↓ ↓ ↓

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

JupterC2_Fax_EN-F_FM.book Page 166 Monday, November 29, 2004 3:48 PM

Page 177: b 7128511

Using Administrator Settings

167

9

❖❖❖❖ User Parameter ListUser Parameter Switches are outlined below.

Switch Bit Item 0 1

02 0 Forwarding Mark Off On

3 TSI Print Off On

03 0 Automatic printing of the Com-munication Result Report

Off On

2 Automatic printing of the Memory Storage Report

Off On

3 Automatic printing of the Poll-ing Reserve Report

Off On

4 Automatic printing of the Poll-ing Result Report

Off On

5 Automatic printing of the Im-mediate TX Result Report

Off On

6 Automatic printing of the Poll-ing Transmission Clear Report

Off On

7 Automatic printing of the Journal

Off On

04 0 Automatic printing of the Confidential File Report

Off On

1 Automatic printing of Com-munication Failure Report and Transfer Result Report

Off On

4 Indicates the parties Off On

5 Include sender's name on re-ports

Off On

7 Include a portion of the image on reports

Off On

FaxAdEN_Chapter-9 Page 167 Wednesday, January 19, 2005 2:40 PM

Page 178: b 7128511

Administrator Setting

168

9

05 0 Receive Service Call (SC) Condition (Substitute Recep-tion during service call)

Possible (Substitute RX)

Not possible (Reception off)

2, 1 Substitute the reception when the machine cannot print (because all pa-per trays have run out of paper, toner is empty, or all paper trays are out of order)

00: Enabled unconditionally (Free)

01: Enabled when Own Name/Own Fax Number is received

10: Enabled for Polling ID match

11: Disabled (Reception off)

5 Print sheet is limited to that which has highest priority.

Off On

7 Empty tray alert (Paper Emp-ty Warning) even when one paper tray is empty

Off On

06 6 First page scanned for book originals

From the left page From the right page

07 2 Parallel Memory Transmis-sion

Off On

08 2 Authorized Reception Type Receiving from only specified

senders

Receiving all mes-sages except those

from specified senders

10 1 Combine two originals Off On

3 Page reduction when printing Off On

5 Reception file setting Off On

11 6 Local print when forwarding Off On

7 Polling file after sending (Polling transmission standby time)

Delete (Use Once) Standby (Save)

14 0 Print documents received with Auto Power-On Recep-tion (Night Printing mode)

Immediate print-ing (On)

When turning on the operation switch (Off)

1 Long Document Transmis-sion (Well Log)

Off On

2 Batch Transmission Off On

3 Reset when function changed Off On

7 System Parameter List Trans-mission

Off On

Switch Bit Item 0 1

JupterC2_Fax_EN-F_FM.book Page 168 Monday, November 29, 2004 3:48 PM

Page 179: b 7128511

Using Administrator Settings

169

9

17 2 Whether you need to press [Add] after entering a Quick Dial/Group Dial when broadcasting

Not necessary Necessary

7 Receive messages by pressing the {{{{Start}}}} key when originals are not set.

Off (The machine does not receive

messages by press-ing the {{{{Start}}}}

key.)

On (The machine receives messages

by pressing the {{{{Start}}}} key.)

18 0 Print date with Fax Header Off On

1 Print transmitter origin with Fax Header

Off On

2 Print file number with Fax Header

Off On

3 Print page number with Fax Header

Off On

19 0 Use paper delivery shift func-tion (Offset Print)

Off On

1 Sort Journal by line type Off On

20 0 Automatic printing of the LAN-Fax Result Report.

Off On

5, 4, 3,2

Reprinting time of stored documents in memory that could not be print-ed using LAN-Fax Driver

0000: 0 minute / 0001: 1 minute / 0010: 2 minutes / 0011: 3 minutes / 0100: 4 minutes / 0101: 5 minutes / 0110: 6 minutes / 0111: 7 minutes / 1000: 8 minutes / 1001: 9 minutes / 1010: 10 minutes / 1011: 11 minutes / 1100: 12 minutes / 1101: 13 minutes / 1110: 14 minutes / 1111: 15 min-utes

21 0 Print results of sending Re-ception Notice Request mes-sage

Off (print only when an error occurs)

On

1 Respond to e-mail reception acknowledgment request

Off On

3 File format for forwarded folders

TIFF PDF

4 Transmit Journal by E-mail Off On

6 Not display Network error Display (Off) Not display (On)

7 Transmit Error Mail Notifica-tion

On Off

24 1, 0 Store a message in memory that could not be transmitted

00: Off, 01: Store for 24 hours, 11: Store for 72 hours

25 2 Fax or telephone in Auto Switch mode

Fax Telephone

4 RDS Off On

Switch Bit Item 0 1

JupterC2_Fax_EN-F_FM.book Page 169 Monday, November 29, 2004 3:48 PM

Page 180: b 7128511

Administrator Setting

170

9

Changing the User Parameters

PreparationAccess to some User ParameterSettings requires installation of op-tional equipment, or that other set-tings be made beforehand.

Important❒ We recommend you print and keep

a User Parameter list when youprogram or change a User Parame-ter. See p.171 “Printing the UserParameter List”.

❒ Do not change any bit switchesother than those shown on the pre-vious pages.

AAAA Press the {{{{User Tools/Counter}}}} key.

BBBB Press [Facsimile Features].

CCCC Press [Administrator Tools].

DDDD Press [Parameter Setting].

EEEE Select the switch number you wantto change.

FFFF Select the bit number you want tochange.

When the bit number is pressed,the current value switches be-tween 1 and 0.

Note❒ Repeat from step F to change

another bit number for the sameswitch.

GGGG Press [OK].

32 0 Quotation Priority for a desti-nation when there is no desti-nation of the specified type.

Paper Output Priority <Priority Order>

1. IP-Fax destina-tion

2. Fax number

3. E-mail address

4. Folder

Electronic Output Priority

<Priority Order>

1. E-mail address

2. Folder

3. IP-Fax destination

4. Fax number

34 0 Use gatekeeper server with IP-Fax

Off On

1 Use SIP server with IP-Fax Off On

Switch Bit Item 0 1

FaxAdEN_Chapter-9 Page 170 Monday, December 13, 2004 5:39 PM

Page 181: b 7128511

Using Administrator Settings

171

9

Note❒ To cancel these settings, press

[Cancel]. The display returns tothat of step E.

HHHH Repeat steps EEEE and GGGG to changethe switch settings.

IIII After all the settings are finished,press [Exit].

JJJJ Press the {{{{User Tools/Counter}}}} key.

The standby display appears.

Printing the User Parameter List

Print this list to see the current UserParameter settings. However, onlyitems of importance or often-useditems are included in the list.

AAAA Press the {{{{User Tools/Counter}}}} key.

BBBB Press [Facsimile Features].

CCCC Press [Administrator Tools].

DDDD Press [Print List] next to “ParameterSetting”.

Note❒ To cancel printing a list, press

[Cancel]. The display returns tothat of step D.

EEEE Press the {{{{Start}}}} key.

Note❒ To cancel printing a list after

pressing the {{{{Start}}}} key, press[Stop Printing]. The display re-turns to that of step D.

FFFF Press the {{{{User Tools/Counter}}}} key.

The standby display appears.

Special Senders to Treat Differently

By programming particular receiversin advance, you can set the followingfunction for each receiver:• Authorized RX• Forwarding• Reception File Print Qty• Print 2 Sided• Memory Lock• RX Reverse Printing• Paper TrayUse the Own Name or Own FaxNumber to program your receivers. Ifthe receiver has a machine of thesame manufacturer, program an OwnName that has already been pro-grammed as a receiver. If the machineis not of the same manufacturer, useOwn Fax Number. You can apply thesame settings to all programmednumbers. You can then customize thesettings for individual numbers asnecessary using the Special SenderRegistration function.The following items can be pro-grammed.• Special Senders (Up to 30. A maxi-

mum of 20 characters for eachname when using G3.)

• Full/Partial agreement When you program own namesand facsimile names for multipledestinations, you can program acommon sequence of characters toidentify destinations using Partialagreement.

JupterC2_Fax_EN-F_FM.book Page 171 Monday, November 29, 2004 3:48 PM

Page 182: b 7128511

Administrator Setting

172

9

❖❖❖❖ Using Full matching

❖❖❖❖ Using Partial matching

Note❒ You can program up to 30 wild

cards.❒ Spaces are ignored when identi-

fications are compared.❒ You can use wild cards for the

following functions:• See p.174 “Program-

ming/Changing Specia lSenders”.

• See p.175 “Authorized RX(Authorized Reception)”.

• See p.175 “Forwarding”.

Limitation❒ You cannot program senders as

Special Senders if they do not haveOwn Name or Own Fax Numberprogrammed.

❒ The machine cannot differentiatebetween Polling Reception andFree Polling documents from Spe-cial Senders.

❒ You cannot use the following func-tions with Internet Fax receptions.• Authorized RX• Reception File Print Qty

• Memory Lock• RX Reverse Printing

Note❒ You can program up to 24 charac-

ters for the sender.❒ You can check Own Name and

Own Fax Number using the Jour-nal. You can check programmedSpecial Senders using the specifiedsender list. See p.27 “Printing theJournal”. See p.180 “Printing theSpecial Sender List”.

❒ To use Forwarding, Print 2 Sided,or Paper Tray with Internet Fax re-ception, program the sender's e-mail address.

❒ If you select “Off” for the SpecialSender function in “Initial Set Up”,the settings will be the same as theReception Settings. See p.147 “Re-ception Settings”.

Authorized Reception

Use this function to limit incomingsenders. The machine only receivesfaxes from programmed SpecialSenders, and therefore, it helps youscreen out unwanted messages, suchas junk mail, and saves wasting faxpaper.

Note❒ To use this function, program the

Special Senders function, and thenselect “On” in “Authorized RX”with “Reception Settings”. Seep.147 “Reception Settings”. Seep.166 “User Parameters” (switch08, bit 2).

❒ Without programming Special Send-ers, the Authorized RX functionwill not work, even if you select“On”.

Destination to be programmed (Own Name)

Number of pro-grammed identifi-cations

NEW YORK BRANCH

HONG KONG BRANCH

SYDNEY BRANCH

3

Destination to be programmed (Own Name)

Number of pro-grammed identifi-cations

BRANCH 1

JupterC2_Fax_EN-F_FM.book Page 172 Monday, November 29, 2004 3:48 PM

Page 183: b 7128511

Using Administrator Settings

173

9

❒ You can select to receive only fromprogrammed senders or receiveonly from senders other than thoseprogrammed in User Parameters.See p.166 “User Parameters”(switch 08, bit 2).

❒ If you select “Off” for “AuthorizedRX” in “Initial Set Up”, the settingswill be the same as the ReceptionMode settings. See p.147 “Recep-tion Settings”.

❒ You can change Special Senders inthe same way as you programthem.

Forwarding

Use this function to print receivedmessages, and then transfer them tothose receivers programmed before-hand.Folder destination can be registered.It is also possible to forward faxessent only by senders programmed asSpecial Senders.

Note❒ To use this function, program your

Special Senders, and then select“On” for “Forwarding” in “Recep-tion Settings”. See p.147 “Recep-tion Settings”.

❒ If you specify “On” in “Forward-ing” and select [Same as Basic Set-tings], the fax message will beforwarded to the other ends pro-grammed in “Specify End Receiv-er”. See p.162 “Forwarding”.

❒ If you do not program any SpecialSenders, the machine transfers allincoming documents to the otherend specified in “Specify End Re-ceiver”.

❒ You can set the fax destination, In-ternet fax destination, IP-Fax desti-nation or folder destination, as aforward destination.

❒ Set folder destinations using theAddress Book Management func-tion under System Settings. See“Registering Folders”, General Set-tings Guide.

❒ If you have specified a folder forforwarding, you can specify thefile format used for forwarding.See p.166 “User Parameters”(switch 21, bit 3).

Reception File Print Quantity

Use this function to print the speci-fied number of copies of documentsreceived from programmed senders(Special Senders). If you do not pro-gram any Special Senders, the ma-chine prints the specified number ofcopies for all received documents.

Limitation❒ You cannot use multi-copy print-

ing with Polling Reception, Confi-dential Reception, or MemoryLock.

Note❒ You can specify up to 10 copies.

Print 2 Sided

Use this function to print on bothsides of paper.

Limitation❒ If you select the bypass tray for

“Paper Tray”, duplex printing isdisabled.

❒ An external tray cannot be used asa destination for a two-sided-printed sheet.

JupterC2_Fax_EN-F_FM.book Page 173 Monday, November 29, 2004 3:48 PM

Page 184: b 7128511

Administrator Setting

174

9

Memory Lock

Use this function to store incomingdocuments from programmed send-ers (Special Senders) in memory with-out printing them. People without theMemory Lock ID cannot print thedocuments, and therefore this func-tion is useful for receiving confiden-t i a l d o c u m e n ts . I f y ou d o no tprogram any senders, the machine re-ceives fax message from all sendersusing Memory Lock reception.

PreparationYou must register Memory LockID in advance. See p.192 “Pro-gramming a Memory Lock ID”.

Referencep.192 “Programming a MemoryLock ID”

Limitation❒ If you program the same sender in

Memory Lock and Forwarding,Forwarding is disabled.

Reception Reverse Printing

Use this function to print the pages inreverse order. See p.100 “Reverse Or-der Printing”.

Paper Tray

Use this function to print documentsreceived from programmed senders(Special Senders) and the documentsfrom other senders on different typesof paper.

For example, if blue paper is in Tray 1and white paper is in Tray 2, the ma-chine prints the documents from Spe-cial Senders on the blue paper andprints the documents from othersenders on the white paper, making iteasy for you to separate the two.If you do not program any SpecialSenders, the machine outputs docu-ments received from all senders usingthe default paper tray.

Limitation❒ For Polling Reception, you cannot

select the paper tray.

Note❒ If the machine receives a message

that has a different size from thepaper in the specified tray, the ma-chine prints it after splitting it orminimizing its size. See p.100“Page Separation and Length Re-duction”.

❒ Selection of the bypass tray en-ables you to specify the paper sizein “Scan Area”.

Programming/Changing Special Senders

AAAA Press the {{{{User Tools/Counter}}}} key.

BBBB Press [Facsimile Features].

CCCC Press [Administrator Tools].

DDDD Press [Program Special Sender].

EEEE Check [Program / Change] is selected.

JupterC2_Fax_EN-F_FM.book Page 174 Monday, November 29, 2004 3:48 PM

Page 185: b 7128511

Using Administrator Settings

175

9

FFFF Select the destination to programor change.

When programming a new SpecialSender, press [* Not Programed].

GGGG Enter a destination name, and thenpress [OK].

Enter a destination name usingOwn Name or Own Fax Number.

Reference“Entering Text”, General Set-tings Guide

HHHH Press [Full Agreement] or [Partial Agree-ment].

IIII Select the item you want to pro-gram.

Note❒ You must select only the item

you want to program.❒ To cancel these settings, press

[Cancel]. The display returns tothat of step E.

Authorized RX (Authorized Reception)

A Select [Authorized RX].

B Press [On] or [Off], and thenpress [OK].

Note❒ After you perform step K, set

“Authorized RX” of “Recep-tion Settings” to “On”. Seep.147 “Reception Settings”.

Forwarding

A Select [Forwarding].

B Select [On] or [Off].

If you select [Off], proceed tostep D.

Note❒ Selecting [Same as Basic Set-

tings] will result in the samesetting made for “Forward-ing” under “AdministratorTools”. See p.162 “Forward-ing”.

JupterC2_Fax_EN-F_FM.book Page 175 Monday, November 29, 2004 3:48 PM

Page 186: b 7128511

Administrator Setting

176

9

C Press the destination key of aforward destination, and thenpress [OK].

Limitation❒ One forward destination can

be registered for a destina-tion. To register two or moreforward destinations, useGroup Destinations. Howev-er a maximum of 500 partiescan be specified in a group.

Note❒ Press the button on the right

of the display to switch thedestination between faxnumber, e-mail address, IP-Fax destination, and folder.

❒ Set folder destinations usingthe Address Book Manage-ment function under SystemSettings. See “RegisteringFolders”, General SettingsGuide.

❒ When a folder is specified asthe forward destination, youcan set a file format for for-warding. See p.166 “User Pa-rameters” (switch 21, bit 3).

❒ Deleting a destination speci-fied as a forward destinationfrom the destination tablecauses the settings of the for-ward destination to be delet-ed, so they must be registeredagain. When a destination ischanged, a message is trans-mitted to the new destina-tion. If there is no destinationof the specified type, you canset a certain destination to bepriority quoted. See p.166“User Parameters” (switch32, bit 0).

D Press [OK].E Press [OK].

Note❒ After you perform step K, set

“Forwarding” of “ReceptionSettings” to “On”. See p.147“Reception Settings”.

Reception File Print Qty

A Select [Reception File Print Qty].

B Press [Number of Sets].

Note❒ Selecting [Same as Basic Set-

tings] will result in the samesetting made for “RX FilePrint Qty” of “Reception Set-tings”. See p.147 “ReceptionSettings”.

JupterC2_Fax_EN-F_FM.book Page 176 Monday, November 29, 2004 3:48 PM

Page 187: b 7128511

Using Administrator Settings

177

9

C Enter the print quantity usingthe number keys, and thenpress [OK].

Note❒ If you make a mistake, press

[Clear] or the {{{{Clear/Stop}}}} keybefore pressing [OK], andthen try again.

Print 2 Sided

A Select [Print 2 Sided].

B Select [On] or [Off], and thenpress [OK].

Note❒ Selecting [Same as Basic Set-

tings] will result in the samesetting made for “2 SidedPrint” of “Reception Set-tings”. See p.147 “ReceptionSettings”.

Memory Lock

A Select [Memory Lock].

B Select [On] or [Off], and thenpress [OK].

Note❒ Selecting [Same as Basic Set-

tings] will result in the samesetting made for “ProgramMemory Lock ID” under“Administrator Tools”. Seep.165 “Memory Lock”.

RX Reverse Printing (Reception Reverse Printing)

A Select [RX Reverse Printing].

B Select [On] or [Off], and thenpress [OK].

Note❒ Selecting [Same as Basic Set-

tings] will result in the samesetting made for “RX ReversePrinting” of “Reception Set-tings”. See p.147 “ReceptionSettings”.

Paper Tray

A Select [Paper Tray].

B Select the tray you want to use,and then press [OK].

Note❒ Selecting [Same as Basic Set-

tings] will result in the samesetting made for “PaperTray” of ”Reception Set-tings”. See p.147 “ReceptionSettings”.

JJJJ Press [OK].A Special Sender has been pro-grammed.

Note❒ To program another sender, re-

peat the procedure from step F.

KKKK Press [Exit].

LLLL Press the {{{{User Tools/Counter}}}} key.

The standby display appears.

FaxAdEN_Chapter-9 Page 177 Tuesday, December 28, 2004 6:46 PM

Page 188: b 7128511

Administrator Setting

178

9

Programming Initial Set Up of a Special Sender

Use this function to program “InitialSet Up” of a Special Sender. You canalso specify the Bypass Tray PaperSize.

AAAA Press the {{{{User Tools/Counter}}}} key.

BBBB Press [Facsimile Features].

CCCC Press [Administrator Tools].

DDDD Press [Program Special Sender].

EEEE Press [Initial Set Up].

FFFF Select the function you want toprogram.

Note❒ In this feature, “Authorized RX”

has the same settings as “Recep-tion Settings”. See p.147 “Re-ception Settings”.

Programming Authorized RX and Special RX Function

A Select [Authorized RX] or [SpecialRX Function].

B Select [On] or [Off], and thenpress [OK].

The illustration shows the “Au-thorized RX” display as an ex-ample.

Programming Bypass Tray Paper Size

A Press [Bypass Tray Paper Size]. You can select a size from [AutoDetect], [Standard Size], or [Cus-tom Size].If you select [Auto Detect], pro-ceed to steps B and G.If you select [Standard Size], pro-ceed to steps B, C, and G.If you select [Custom Size], pro-ceed to steps B , and D to G.

B Select the size you want to pro-gram.

JupterC2_Fax_EN-F_FM.book Page 178 Monday, November 29, 2004 3:48 PM

Page 189: b 7128511

Using Administrator Settings

179

9

Note❒ If you select [Auto Detect], the

machine recognizes the pa-per size automatically.• The machine will detect

the paper size for the by-pass tray as the short edgeof the paper is insertedinto the machine. Even ifyou placed an A4 sizesheet in theK orientation,the machine will detect itas A3L.

❒ If you select [Standard Size],select a paper size displayed,and then proceed to step G.

❒ If you select [Custom Size],proceed to step D.

C Select the size you want to pro-gram from the sizes shown.

D Make sure that [Vertical] is se-lected.

E Enter the vertical size of the pa-per using the number keys,and then press [####].

Note❒ You can specify a vertical

size from 210mm (8.3 inch) to305mm (12.0 inch). You can-not enter a size smaller than210 m m o r l a rg e r t h an305mm.

❒ Each time you press [mm] or[inch], the units switch be-tween “mm” and “inch”. Ifyo u en t e r a l e n g t h a ndchange the units by pressing[mm] or [inch], it is convertedautomatically (fractions arerounded off).

F Enter the horizontal size of thepaper using the number keys,and then press [####].

Note❒ You can specify a horizontal

size from 148mm (5.9 inch) to600mm (23.7 inch). You can-not enter a size smaller than1 4 8 m m o r l a r g e r t h a n600mm.

❒ Each time you press [mm] or[inch], the units switch be-tween “mm” and “inch”. Ifyo u en t e r a l e n g t h a ndchange the units by pressing[mm] or [inch], it is convertedautomatically (fractions arerounded off).

G Press [OK].

GGGG Press [Exit].

HHHH Press the {{{{User Tools/Counter}}}} key.

The standby display appears.

JupterC2_Fax_EN-F_FM.book Page 179 Monday, November 29, 2004 3:48 PM

Page 190: b 7128511

Administrator Setting

180

9

Deleting a Special Sender

Use this function to program “InitialSet Up” of a Special Sender. The By-pass Tray Paper Size can also be spec-ified.

AAAA Press the {{{{User Tools/Counter}}}} key.

BBBB Press [Facsimile Features].

CCCC Press [Administrator Tools].

DDDD Press [Program Special Sender].

EEEE Press [Delete], and then select theSpecial Sender you want to de-lete.

FFFF Press [Delete].

Note❒ To cancel deleting a special

sender, press [Do not Delete]. Thedisplay returns to that of step E.

GGGG Press [Exit].

HHHH Press the {{{{User Tools/Counter}}}} key.

The standby display appears.

Printing the Special Sender List

AAAA Press the {{{{User Tools/Counter}}}} key.

BBBB Press [Facsimile Features].

CCCC Press [Administrator Tools].

DDDD Press [Print List] next to “ProgramSpecial Sender”.

Note❒ To cancel printing, press [Can-

cel]. The display returns to thatof step D.

EEEE Press the {{{{Start}}}} key.

Note❒ To cancel printing after press-

ing the {{{{Start}}}} key, press [StopPrinting]. The display returns tothat of step D.

FFFF Press the {{{{User Tools/Counter}}}} key.

The standby display appears.

Box Settings

The following functions are for deliv-ery and transfer of messages:• Personal Box• Information Box• Transfer Box

ReferenceFor details about how to set upthese functions:• p.181 “Programming/chang-

ing Personal Boxes”• p.184 “Programming/chang-

ing Information Boxes”• p.186 “Programming/chang-

ing Transfer Boxes”For details about how to print outand delete messages stored in box-es:• p.40 “Personal Boxes”• p.42 “Information Boxes”

JupterC2_Fax_EN-F_FM.book Page 180 Monday, November 29, 2004 3:48 PM

Page 191: b 7128511

Using Administrator Settings

181

9

Limitation❒ You cannot set the same Box code

on two different boxes.❒ Transmission or programming may

not be allowed if there is notenough free memory left. Theamount of free memory left differsdepending on the optional equip-ment installed.

Note❒ The combined total of items that

can be stored using the PersonalBox, Information Box, and Trans-fer Box functions is 150.

Programming/changing Personal Boxes

This section describes how to pro-gram Personal Boxes.You can store the following items:• Box name (required)

Up to 20 characters long• SUB Code (required)

Up to 20 characters long and can becomposed of digits 0-9, “#”, “*”,and spaces (the first character can-not be a space).

• Password (optional)Up to 20 characters long and can becomposed of digits 0-9, “#”, “*”,and spaces (the first character can-not be a space).

Note❒ When programming a pass-

word, a mark is displayed be-fore the Box name.

• Receiver (optional)You can program one delivery des-tination for each Personal Box.Specify a delivery destination pro-grammed in Quick Dial.

Note❒ You can specify a fax number, In-

ternet Fax destination and IP-Faxdestination as the transmissiondestination.

❒ The contents of the Personal Boxwill be saved until printing is com-pleted.

❒ The Fax Header is not printed ondelivered messages.

❒ If a message cannot be delivered, aCommunication Failure Report isprinted and the message is savedas a Confidential Reception docu-ment.

❒ You can edit boxes in the sameway you program them. However,to change the SUB Code itself, youmust delete the box, and then pro-gram a new SUB Code.

❒ If a destination in the destinationtable is deleted after being regis-tered, delivery is not performedand the settings of the deliverydestination are also deleted. Also,when a delivery destination ischanged, a message is sent to thechanged destination. If there is nodestination of the specified type,you can set a certain destination tobe priority quoted. See p.166 “UserParameters” (switch 32, bit 0).

Referencep.40 “Personal Boxes”

AAAA Press the {{{{User Tools/Counter}}}} key.

BBBB Press [Facsimile Features].

CCCC Press [Administrator Tools].

DDDD Press [Box Setting].

JupterC2_Fax_EN-F_FM.book Page 181 Monday, November 29, 2004 3:48 PM

Page 192: b 7128511

Administrator Setting

182

9

EEEE Check that [Program / Change] is se-lected.

FFFF Select a box to program.

When programming a new box,press [* Not Programed].

Note❒ To change a box already pro-

grammed, press it and proceedto step I.

GGGG Press [Personal Box].

HHHH Enter a box name, and then press[OK].

Reference“Entering Text”, General Set-tings Guide

IIII Enter a SUB Code.

Note❒ To change the SUB Code, press

[Clear] or the {{{{Clear/Stop}}}} key,and then try again. To change aBox name, press [Box Name], andthen repeat the procedure fromstep H.

JJJJ Specify the settings you require.

If you do not want to program apassword or receiver, proceed tostep K.

Programming a password

A Press [Password].B Enter a password, and then

press [OK].

Note❒ If you make a mistake, press

[Clear] or the {{{{Clear/Stop}}}} keybefore pressing [OK], andthen try again.

C Re-enter the password, andthen press [OK].

Note❒ If you make a mistake, press

[Clear] or the {{{{Clear/Stop}}}} keybefore pressing [OK], andthen try again.

❒ To change the password afterpressing [OK], press [Change]and repeat steps B and C, orpress [Cancel] and repeat theprocedure from step A.

D Press [OK].

JupterC2_Fax_EN-F_FM.book Page 182 Monday, November 29, 2004 3:48 PM

Page 193: b 7128511

Using Administrator Settings

183

9

Programming an End Receiver

A Press [Receiver].B Select a destination using the

Quick Dial Table, and thenpress [OK].

Note❒ Press the button shown on

the right side of the screen tos w i t c h th e d e s t i n a t i o namong fax number, InternetFax address and IP-Fax ad-dress.

KKKK Press [OK].

LLLL Press [Exit].

MMMM Press the {{{{User Tools/Counter}}}} key.

The standby display appears.

Deleting Personal Boxes

This section describes how to deletePersonal Boxes.

Limitation❒ If messages have been programmed

in the box, you cannot delete thebox.

AAAA Press the {{{{User Tools/Counter}}}} key.

BBBB Press [Facsimile Features].

CCCC Press [Administrator Tools].

DDDD Press [Box Setting].

EEEE Press [Delete], and then select thebox you want to delete.

With a programmed password

A Enter a password using thenumber keys, and then press[OK].

Note❒ If you make a mistake, press

[Clear] or the {{{{Clear/Stop}}}} key.

FFFF Press [Delete].

Note❒ To cancel deleting a box, press

[Do not Delete]. The display re-turns to that of step E.

GGGG Press [Exit].

HHHH Press the {{{{User Tools/Counter}}}} key.

The standby display appears.

JupterC2_Fax_EN-F_FM.book Page 183 Monday, November 29, 2004 3:48 PM

Page 194: b 7128511

Administrator Setting

184

9

Programming/changing Information Boxes

This section describes how to set upan Information Box.You can store the following items:• Box name (required)

Up to 20 characters long• SEP Code (required)

Up to 20 characters long and can becomposed of digits 0-9, “#”, “*”,and spaces (the first character can-not be a space).

• Password (optional)Up to 20 characters long and can becomposed of digits 0-9, “#”, “*”,and spaces (the first character can-not be a space).When programming a password, amark is displayed before the Boxname.

Note❒ You can edit boxes in the same

way you program them. However,to change the SEP Code itself, youmust delete the box, and then pro-gram a new SEP Code.

❒ If a destination in the destinationtable is deleted after being regis-tered, delivery is not performedand the settings of the deliverydestination are also deleted. Also,when a delivery destination ischanged, a message is sent to thechanged destination. If there is nodestination of the specified type,you can set a certain destination tobe priority quoted. See p.166 “UserParameters” (switch 32, bit 0).

Referencep.42 “Information Boxes”

AAAA Press the {{{{User Tools/Counter}}}} key.

BBBB Press [Facsimile Features].

CCCC Press [Administrator Tools].

DDDD Press [Box Setting].

EEEE Check that [Program / Change] is se-lected.

FFFF Select the box to program.

When programming a new box,press [* Not Programed].

Note❒ To change a box already pro-

grammed, press it, and thenproceed to step I. If a passwordhas been programmed, enterthe password, press [OK], andthen proceed to step I.

GGGG Press [Information Box].

HHHH Enter a box name, and then press[OK].

Reference“Entering Text”, General Set-tings Guide

FaxAdEN_Chapter-9 Page 184 Monday, December 20, 2004 11:23 AM

Page 195: b 7128511

Using Administrator Settings

185

9

IIII Enter the SEP Code.

Note❒ To change the SEP Code, press

[Clear] or the {{{{Clear/Stop}}}} key,and then try again. To changethe box name, press [Box Name],and then repeat the procedurefrom step H.

JJJJ Press [Password].

Note❒ If you do not want to program a

password, proceed to step N.

KKKK Enter a password, and then press[OK].

Note❒ If you make a mistake, press

[Clear] or the {{{{Clear/Stop}}}} key be-fore pressing [OK], and then tryagain.

LLLL Re-enter the password, and thenpress [OK].

Note❒ If you make a mistake, press

[Clear] or the {{{{Clear/Stop}}}} key be-fore pressing [OK], and then tryagain.

❒ To change the password afterpressing [OK], press [Change]and repeat steps K and L, orpress [Cancel] and repeat theprocedure from step J.

MMMM Press [OK].

NNNN Press [OK].

OOOO Press [Exit].

PPPP Press the {{{{User Tools/Counter}}}} key.The standby display appears.

Deleting Information Boxes

This section describes how to deleteInformation Boxes.

Limitation❒ If messages have been programmed

in the box, you cannot delete thebox.

AAAA Press the {{{{User Tools/Counter}}}} key.

JupterC2_Fax_EN-F_FM.book Page 185 Monday, November 29, 2004 3:48 PM

Page 196: b 7128511

Administrator Setting

186

9

BBBB Press [Facsimile Features].

CCCC Press [Administrator Tools].

DDDD Press [Box Setting].

EEEE Press [Delete], and then select thebox you want to delete.

With a programmed password

A Enter a password using thenumber keys, and then press[OK].

Note❒ If you make a mistake, press

[Clear] or the {{{{Clear/Stop}}}} key.

FFFF Press [Delete].

Note❒ To cancel deleting a box, press

[Do not Delete]. The display re-turns to that of step E.

GGGG Press [Exit].

HHHH Press the {{{{User Tools/Counter}}}} key.

The standby display appears.

Programming/changing Transfer Boxes

This function turns your machine intoa fax relay station. Documents sentwith a SUB Code that matches theSUB Code programmed as a TransferBox are received, and then relayed toa programmed receiver. Since documents can be sent to multi-ple destinations in a single transfer re-quest, you can economize on callcharges when sending to remote des-tinations.

Note❒ Inform the Requesting Party of the

SUB Code assigned to the TransferBox. When they want to have amessage transferred by your ma-chine, ask them to send the mes-s ag e us in g SU B C o d eTransmission and specifying thisSUB Code. If a password has alsobeen programmed, inform them ofthis too, and ask them to enter it asthe SID code.

You can store the following items:• Box name (required)

Up to 20 characters• SUB Code (required)

Up to 20 characters long and can becomposed of digits 0-9, “#”, “*”,and spaces (the first character can-not be a space).

JupterC2_Fax_EN-F_FM.book Page 186 Monday, November 29, 2004 3:48 PM

Page 197: b 7128511

Using Administrator Settings

187

9

• Password (optional)Up to 20 characters long and can becomposed of digits 0-9, “#”, “*”,and spaces (the first character can-not be a space).

Note❒ When programming a password,

a mark is displayed in front ofthe Box name.

• End Receiver (required)You can store five End Receivers(destinations to which messageswill be forwarded) for each box.Specify End Receivers with QuickDials or Groups assigned to QuickDials that have been programmedbeforehand.

Limitation❒ After messages are transferred,

Transfer Result Reports are notsent back to the sender.

Note❒ You can specify the Internet fax

destination and IP-Fax destinationas a reception station.

❒ After messages are transferred,they are deleted.

❒ When this function is turned on,the machine prints out the re-ceived messages it transfers and aTransfer Result Report after thetransfer has finished. If you wantto turn this function off, pleasecontact your service representa-tive.

❒ When the programmed receiver isa Multi-step Transfer Group Dial,Multi-step Transfer takes place.For more information, contactyour service representative.

❒ You can edit boxes in the sameway you program them.

❒ If you delete a destination speci-fied as a reception destination us-ing the destination table, thesettings of the reception destina-tion are also deleted, so they mustbe registered again. When a desti-nation is changed, a message istransmitted to the new destination.If there is no destination of thespecified type, you can set a certaindestination to be priority quoted.See p.166 “User Parameters”(switch 32, bit 0).

AAAA Press the {{{{User Tools/Counter}}}} key.

BBBB Press [Facsimile Features].

CCCC Press [Administrator Tools].

DDDD Press [Box Setting].

EEEE Check that Select [Program / Change]is selected.

FFFF Select the box to program.

When programming a new box,press [* Not Programed].

Note❒ To change a box already pro-

grammed, press it, and thenproceed to step I.

GGGG Press [Transfer Box].

JupterC2_Fax_EN-F_FM.book Page 187 Monday, November 29, 2004 3:48 PM

Page 198: b 7128511

Administrator Setting

188

9

HHHH Enter a Box name, and then press[OK].

Reference“Entering Text”, General Set-tings Guide

IIII Enter a SUB Code.

Note❒ To change the SUB Code, press

[Clear] or the {{{{Clear/Stop}}}} key,and then try again. To changeBox name, press [Box Name], andthen repeat from step H.

JJJJ Specify the condition of registra-tion.

Programming End Receivers

A Select an End Receiver.

Note❒ You can store five End Re-

ceivers.B Specify End Receivers with

Quick Dials, and then press[OK].

Note❒ You can change the display

to the fax destination, Inter-net fax destination, and IP-Fax destination using thebutton on the right side of thedisplay.

❒ A reception station can alsobe registered as a group des-tination. In such a case, amaximum of 500 parties in-cluding End Receivers 1-5can be specified in a group.

To register another End Receiv-ers, repeat the procedure fromstep A.

Programming a password

If you do not want to program apassword, proceed to step K.A Press [Password].

B Enter a password, and then press[OK].

Note❒ If you make a mistake, press

[Clear] or the {{{{Clear/Stop}}}} keybefore pressing [OK], andthen try again.

FaxAdEN_Chapter-9 Page 188 Monday, December 20, 2004 11:23 AM

Page 199: b 7128511

Using Administrator Settings

189

9

C Re-enter the password, and thenpress [OK].

Note❒ If you make a mistake, press

[Clear] or the {{{{Clear/Stop}}}} keybefore pressing [OK], andthen try again.

❒ To change the password afterpressing [OK], press [Change]and repeat steps B and C, orpress [Cancel] and repeat theprocedure from step A.

D Press [OK].

KKKK Press [OK].

LLLL Press [Exit].

MMMM Press the {{{{User Tools/Counter}}}} key.The standby display appears.

Deleting Transfer Boxes

AAAA Press the {{{{User Tools/Counter}}}} key.

BBBB Press [Facsimile Features].

CCCC Press [Administrator Tools].

DDDD Press [Box Setting].

EEEE Press [Delete], and then select thebox you want to delete.

With a programmed password

A Enter a password using thenumber keys, and then press[OK].

Note❒ If you make a mistake, press

[Clear] or the {{{{Clear/Stop}}}} key.

FFFF Press [Delete].

Note❒ To cancel deleting a special send-

er, press [Do not Delete]. The dis-play returns to that of step E.

GGGG Press [Exit].

HHHH Press the {{{{User Tools/Counter}}}} key.

The standby display appears.

JupterC2_Fax_EN-F_FM.book Page 189 Monday, November 29, 2004 3:48 PM

Page 200: b 7128511

Administrator Setting

190

9

Printing the Box List

Follow the procedure below to print al ist showing the currently pro-grammed Personal Boxes, Informa-tion Boxes, and Transfer Boxes.

AAAA Press the {{{{User Tools/Counter}}}} key.

BBBB Press [Facsimile Features].

CCCC Press [Administrator Tools].

DDDD Press [Print List] next to “Box Set-ting”.

EEEE Press the {{{{Start}}}} key.

After printing the list, you can thenstart from step D.

Note❒ To cancel printing a list before

pressing the {{{{Start}}}} key, press[Cancel] or the {{{{Clear/Stop}}}} key.The display returns to that ofstep D.

❒ To cancel printing a list afterpressing the {{{{Start}}}} key, press[Stop Printing]. The display re-turns to that of step D.

FFFF Press the {{{{User Tools/Counter}}}} key.The standby display appears.

Transfer Report

For the Requesting Party to be able toreceive Transfer Result Reports fromthe Transfer Station, the RequestingParty must program the number ofthe telephone line in connection ontheir own machine. See p.52 “Trans-fer Request”.Be sure to insert a pause after the areacode.For example, if you are in the UnitedStates and your fax number is 212-1234567, program the following:• 1212-1234567

You can program the fax number forthe G3 line.

Limitation❒ You cannot program or edit a Trans-

fer Report when using a line (dur-ing communication). Program oredit after communication.

Note❒ You cannot use Transfer Request if

the telephone number of their ma-chine is not programmed into thatmachine.

❒ Up to 16 digits are available for G3.

AAAA Press the {{{{User Tools/Counter}}}} key.

BBBB Press [Facsimile Features].

CCCC Press [Administrator Tools].

DDDD Press [Transfer Report].

JupterC2_Fax_EN-F_FM.book Page 190 Monday, November 29, 2004 3:48 PM

Page 201: b 7128511

Using Administrator Settings

191

9

EEEE Specify the fax number.

Programming a G3 Fax Number

A Press [G3 Fax No. (Dir.)].

B Enter your facsimile numberusing the number keys, andthen press [OK].

Note❒ If you make a mistake, press

[Clear] or the {{{{Clear/Stop}}}} key.

FFFF Press [Exit].

GGGG Press the {{{{User Tools/Counter}}}} key.

The standby display appears.

Programming a Confidential ID

Program a Confidential ID to print aConfidential Reception. See p.36“Printing a Confidential Message”.

Note❒ If you do not program a Confiden-

tial ID, you cannot receive a Confi-dential Transmission.

AAAA Press the {{{{User Tools/Counter}}}} key.

BBBB Press [Facsimile Features].

CCCC Press [Administrator Tools].

DDDD Press [Program Confidential ID].

EEEE Enter an ID using the number keys,and then press [OK].

Note❒ A Confidential ID can be any

four-digit number, except 0000.❒ If you make a mistake, press

[Clear] or the {{{{Clear/Stop}}}} key be-fore pressing [OK], and then tryagain.

To cancel programming an ID,press [Cancel]. The display returnsto that of step D.

FFFF Press the {{{{User Tools/Counter}}}} key.

The standby display appears.

FaxAdEN_Chapter-9 Page 191 Wednesday, January 19, 2005 2:41 PM

Page 202: b 7128511

Administrator Setting

192

9

Programming a Polling ID

Program a Polling ID to use theTransfer Request, Transfer Station,Default ID Polling Transmission, andDefault ID Polling Reception func-tions. When you use ID Transmission,program the same ID as the one pro-grammed on the sender's machine.

Referencep.11 “Polling Transmission”p.14 “Polling Reception”p.52 “Transfer Request”p.75 “Selecting transmission op-tions for a single transmission”

AAAA Press the {{{{User Tools/Counter}}}} key.

BBBB Press [Facsimile Features].

CCCC Press [Administrator Tools].

DDDD Press [Program Polling ID].

EEEE Enter an ID using the number keysand [A] to [F], and then press [OK].

Note❒ Register a four-digit number us-

ing 0 through 9 and A through F(expect for 0000 and FFFF).

❒ If you make a mistake, press[Clear] or the {{{{Clear/Stop}}}} key be-fore pressing [OK], and then tryagain.

❒ To cancel programming an ID,press [Cancel]. The display re-turns to that of step D.

FFFF Press the {{{{User Tools/Counter}}}} key.

The standby display appears.

Programming a Memory Lock ID

Program a Memory Lock ID to be en-tered before printing documentswhen the Memory Lock function isactivated.

AAAA Press the {{{{User Tools/Counter}}}} key.

BBBB Press [Facsimile Features].

CCCC Press [Administrator Tools].

DDDD Press [Program Memory Lock ID].

EEEE Enter an ID using the number keys,and then press [OK].

Note❒ A Memory Lock ID can be any

four-digit number, except 0000.

JupterC2_Fax_EN-F_FM.book Page 192 Monday, November 29, 2004 3:48 PM

Page 203: b 7128511

Using Administrator Settings

193

9

❒ If you make a mistake, press[Clear] or the {{{{Clear/Stop}}}} key be-fore pressing [OK], and then tryagain.

❒ To cancel programming an ID,press [Cancel]. The display re-turns to that of step D.

FFFF Press the {{{{User Tools/Counter}}}} key.

The standby display appears.

Selecting Dial/Push Phone

Use this function to select a line typewhen the machine is connected to aG3 analog line.Dial and Push lines are available forselection.

Note❒ When the optional G3 expansion

unit is installed, “G3-2” appears.❒ This function is not available in

some areas.

AAAA Press the {{{{User Tools/Counter}}}} key.

BBBB Press [Facsimile Features].

CCCC Press [Administrator Tools].

DDDD Press [Select Dial / Push Phone].

EEEE Press [Push Button Phone] or [DialPhone (10PPS)] to select the line,and then press [OK].

Referencep.202 “Selecting the Line Type”

FFFF Press the {{{{User Tools/Counter}}}} key.The standby display appears.

Storing or Printing Received Documents

Specify whether received documentsare to be saved on the hard disk orprinted immediately without beingsaved. You can print stored docu-ments repeatedly or download themas images to a computer using a WebImage Monitor or DeskTopBinder. Ifyou select printing without saving,documents are printed each time theyare received.

Limitation❒ If using System Settings you have

set the machine to distribute re-ceived faxes to the delivery server,the documents cannot be saved onthe hard disk.

Note❒ You can use “User Parameters”

(switch 10, bit 5) to set whether ornot to print stored received docu-ment. See p.166 “User Parame-ters”.

JupterC2_Fax_EN-F_FM.book Page 193 Monday, November 29, 2004 3:48 PM

Page 204: b 7128511

Administrator Setting

194

9

❒ If the facsimile is set to store re-ceived documents, document re-cep t io n can be no t i f ied t o aspecified e-mail address.

❒ Documents saved on the hard diskare categorized as received andstored documents. For detailsabout printing saved documents,see p.34 “Printing/Deleting Re-ceived and Stored Documents(Print/Delete Stored RX File)”.

❒ You cannot switch the setting if re-ceived documents have beenstored on the hard disk. To switchthe setting, print documents storedon the hard disk if necessary, andthen delete them.

❒ Received confidential messages arestored in memory. Use the PrintConfidential RX File function toprint them.

❒ With [Store] selected, more memo-ry space will be used as the num-ber of saved documents increase.After memory space becomes in-sufficient, no more documents aresaved on the hard disk. If this hap-pens, the machine will start print-ing and deleting saved documentswith the oldest one.

❒ You can store received documentsup to a total of approximately 320pages or 2,240 (when the optionalexpansion memory is installed) ofA4 size Standard <ITU-T#4Chart>.

❒ You cannot send received docu-ments.

❒ You cannot manage documentsstored on the Document Serverdisplay.

AAAA Press the {{{{User Tools/Counter}}}} key.

BBBB Press [Facsimile Features].

CCCC Press [Administrator Tools].

DDDD Press [Reception File Setting].

EEEE Select [Print] or [Store], and thenpress [OK].

Note❒ To cancel your selection, press

[Cancel]. The display returns tothat of step D.

❒ When [Store] is selected, you canselect whether or not to sendnotice of reception to a specifice-mail address. To notify of re-ception, press [Notify Dest.] andselect an e-mail address fromthe Internet Fax destinationsprogrammed in the addressbook. Further, you can register agroup destination. In such acase, a maximum of 500 partiescan be specified in a group.

FFFF Press the {{{{User Tools/Counter}}}} key.

The standby display appears.

Reception Report e-mail

When a received document is stored,this report is sent to the e-mail ad-dress set as the destination for notifi-cation.

JupterC2_Fax_EN-F_FM.book Page 194 Monday, November 29, 2004 3:48 PM

Page 205: b 7128511

Using Administrator Settings

195

9

Setting a User for Viewing Received and Stored Documents

The administrator can be specified formanaging documents stored on themachine after fax messages are re-ceived. To specify the administrator,enter the administrator user code formanaging documents using Web Im-age Monitor or DeskTopBinderLite/Professional.

PreparationYou must register the administra-tor's User Code to the destinationtable in advance. See “Authentica-tion Information”, General SettingsGuide

Note❒ This function is only available when

received documents are saved onthe hard disk. See p.193 “Storing orPrinting Received Documents”.

❒ If the programmed user code hasbeen deleted using the AddressBook Management function underSystem Settings, you cannot viewreceived and saved documents us-ing a Web Image Monitor. Select[Off] in step E or reprogram a usercode.

❒ If the specified user is deleted fromthe address book, a message “de-leted from address book” will ap-pear. Specify the user again fromthe start.

AAAA Press the {{{{User Tools/Counter}}}} key.

BBBB Press [Facsimile Features].

CCCC Press [Administrator Tools].

DDDD Press [Stored RX File User Setting].

EEEE If you want to use a user code,press [On].

Note❒ If you do not want to use a user

code, press [Off] and proceed tostep H.

❒ To cancel the selection, press[Cancel]. The display returns tothat of step D.

FFFF Press the destination key of theuser you wish to specify, and thenpress [OK].

GGGG Check the selected user, and thenpress [OK].

FaxAdEN_Chapter-9 Page 195 Monday, December 20, 2004 11:23 AM

Page 206: b 7128511

Administrator Setting

196

9

Note❒ When a programmed user is de-

leted from the destination list, amessage “Deleted from Ad-dress Book” is displayed. Re-en-ter the user.

HHHH Press [OK].

IIII Press the {{{{User Tools/Counter}}}} key.

The standby display appears.

Menu Protection Settings

You can set up user access rights forfunctions that users other than ad-ministrators can set. For details de-scription, ask the administrator.

JupterC2_Fax_EN-F_FM.book Page 196 Monday, November 29, 2004 3:48 PM

Page 207: b 7128511

197

10. Solving Operation Problems

When an Error Report is Printed

An Error Report is printed if a mes-sage cannot be successfully sent or re-ceived.Possible causes include a problemwith your machine or noise on thetelephone line. If an error occurs dur-ing transmission, resend the original.If an error occurs during reception,ask the sender to resend the message.

Note❒ If an error happens frequently,

contact your service representa-tive.

❒ The “Page” column gives the totalnumber of pages. The “Page NotSent” column gives the number ofpages not sent or received success-fully.

❒ You can display a destination withthe User Parameters. See p.166“User Parameters” (switch 04, bit4).

❒ You can display a sender namewith the User Parameters. Seep.166 “User Parameters” (switch04, bit 5).

JupterC2_Fax_EN-F_FM.book Page 197 Monday, November 29, 2004 3:48 PM

Page 208: b 7128511

Solving Operation Problems

198

10

Turning Off the Main Power / When a Power Failure Occurs

R CAUTION:

Even if the main power switch isturned off, the contents of the ma-chine memory (for example, pro-grammed numbers) will not be lost.However, if power is lost for aboutone hour because the main powerswitch is turned off, there is a powercut, or the power cable is removed,contents of the Fax memory will belost. Lost items will include any faxmessages stored in memory usingMemory Transmission/Reception,Auto Document, Confidential Recep-tion, Memory Lock, or Substitute Re-ception.If a file has been deleted from memo-ry, a Power Failure Report is auto-matically printed as soon as thepower is restored. This report can beused to identify lost files. If a memorystored for Memory Transmission waslost, resend it. If a message receivedby Memory Reception or SubstituteReception was lost, ask the sender toresend it.

Important❒ Do not turn off the main power

switch while the power indicator islit or blinking. If you do, the harddisk and memory may be dam-aged and failure could result.

❒ Turn off the main power switch be-fore pulling out the plug. If youpull out the plug with the switchon, the hard disk and memory maybe damaged and failure could re-sult.

❒ Make sure that 100% is shown onthe display before you unplug themachine. If a lower value is shown,some data is currently present inmemory.

❒ Right after a power failure, the in-ternal battery needs to be suffi-ciently recharged to guard againstfuture data loss. Keep the machineplugged in and the main powerswitch on for about one week afterthe power loss.

----RDS (Remote Diagnostic System)If your machine has a problem, a ser-vice representative can perform vari-ous settings over the telephone linefrom the service station.If you want to use this function,change the User Parameter. See p.166“User Parameters” (switch 25, bit 4).

• When you disconnect the power plug from the wall outlet, always pull the plug (not the cable).

JupterC2_Fax_EN-F_FM.book Page 198 Monday, November 29, 2004 3:48 PM

Page 209: b 7128511

When an Error Occurs Using Internet Fax

199

10

When an Error Occurs Using Internet Fax

Error Mail Notification

The machine sends the Error Mail Notification to the sender when it is unable tosuccessfully receive a particular e-mail message. A “cc” of this notification is alsosent to the administrator's e-mail address when one is specified.

Note❒ You can select to send Error Mail Notification with User Parameters. See

p.166 “User Parameters” (switch 21, bit 7).❒ If Error Mail Notification cannot be sent, the Error Report (E-Mail) is printed

by the machine.❒ If an error occurs when an e-mail is received via SMTP, the SMTP server

sends an error e-mail to the originator of the message.

Error Report (E-Mail)

The Error Report (E-Mail) is printed by the machine when it is unable to send anError Mail Notification.

Server-Generated Error E-mail

The transmitting server sends this error e-mail to the originator of e-mail thatcannot be transmitted successfully (due to reasons such as specifying an incor-rect e-mail address).

Note❒ After a server-generated error e-mail is printed, the first page of the sent doc-

ument is printed.

JupterC2_Fax_EN-F_FM.book Page 199 Monday, November 29, 2004 3:48 PM

Page 210: b 7128511

Solving Operation Problems

200

10

JupterC2_Fax_EN-F_FM.book Page 200 Monday, November 29, 2004 3:48 PM

Page 211: b 7128511

201

11. Appendix

Connecting the Machine to a Telephone Line and Telephone

Connecting the Telephone Line

To connect the machine to a telephone line, use a snap-in modular type connec-tor.

Important❒ Make sure the connector is the correct type before you start.

❖❖❖❖ Where to connect the machine

1. G3 interface unit connector

2. External telephone connector

3. Extra G3 interface unit connector

AAG010S

JupterC2_Fax_EN-F_FM.book Page 201 Monday, November 29, 2004 3:48 PM

Page 212: b 7128511

Appendix

202

11

Selecting the Line Type

Select the line type to which the machine is connected. There are two types: toneand pulse dial.

Note❒ This function is not available in some areas.Select the line type using “Administrator Settings”. See p.193 “Selecting Di-al/Push Phone”.

Connecting the Optional Handset or an External Telephone

You can connect the optional handset or an external telephone to the machine.You can use it for telephone calls.

Note❒ Some external telephones may not be connected or may suffer reduced func-

tionality.

Limitation❒ When you use the optional handset or an external telephone with the {{{{On

Hook Dial}}}} key for telephone calls, you can not talk with the other party with-out pressing the {{{{On Hook Dial}}}} key after taking off the receiver.

❖❖❖❖ Specifying the handset line type

The switch on the handset should be in the appropriate position-TT (Tone Di-aling) or DP (Pulse Dialing).

DPTT

ND1X00E0

JupterC2_Fax_EN-F_FM.book Page 202 Monday, November 29, 2004 3:48 PM

Page 213: b 7128511

Connecting the Machine to a Telephone Line and Telephone

203

11

❖❖❖❖ Adjusting the handset bell volume

Adjust the handset ringer volume using the volume switch.

DPTT

ND1X00E0

JupterC2_Fax_EN-F_FM.book Page 203 Monday, November 29, 2004 3:48 PM

Page 214: b 7128511

Appendix

204

11

Optional Equipment

Expansion Memory (32MB: DIMM)

This allows you to send fax messages at high resolution (Super Fine). This alsoallows you to receive fax messages at high resolution (Fine or Super Fine). If yourequire this option, consult your service representative. See p.212 “MaximumValues”.

Handset

You can make or receive calls by installing the optional handset and dialingmanually.

Referencep.58 “Manual Dial”

Extra G3 Interface Unit

This option provides one extra G3 line connection.A maximum of two G3 interface unit can be installed.

JupterC2_Fax_EN-F_FM.book Page 204 Monday, November 29, 2004 3:48 PM

Page 215: b 7128511

Specifications

205

11

Specifications

❖❖❖❖ Fax Transmission and Reception

❖❖❖❖ Power Consumption

Standard G3

Resolution G3:

8 × 3.85/mm·200 × 100dpi (Standard character),

8 × 7.7/mm·200 × 200dpi (Detail character),

8 × 15.4/mm (Fine character: optional expansion memory required),

16 × 15.4/mm·400 × 400dpi (Super Fine character: optional expansion memory required)

Transmission time G3: 3 seconds at 28,800 bps, Standard resolution

(JBIG transmission: 2 seconds)

Data compression method MH, MR, MMR, JBIG

Maximum original size Standard size: A3, 11" × 17"

Maximum scanning size Standard size: 297 × 432mm/11" × 17"

Irregular size: 297 × 1,200mm/11" × 47"

Print process Printing on standard paper using a laser

Transmission speed G3:

33,600/31,200/28,800/26,400/24,000/21,600/19,200/16,800/14,400/12,000/9,600/7,200/4,800/2,400bps (auto shift down system)

Standby mode approx. 250 W

Low power mode approx. 140 W

Sleep mode 19 W or less

Immediate Transmission approx. 270 W

Memory Transmission approx. 260 W

Memory Reception approx. 260 W

Reception approx. 760 W

Maximum power consumption 1,500 W or less

FaxAdEN_Appendix-11 Page 205 Tuesday, December 28, 2004 6:46 PM

Page 216: b 7128511

Appendix

206

11

❖❖❖❖ Internet Fax Transmission and Reception

*1 Full mode

Network LAN : Local Area Network

Ethernet/10Base-T, 100Base-TX, IEEE1394 (IP over 1394), IEEE802.11b (wireless LAN)

Transmit function E-mail

Scan line density 200 × 100dpi (Standard character), 200 × 200dpi (Detail char-acter), 200 × 400dpi (Fine character: optional) *1 , 400 × 400dpi (Super Fine character: optional) *1

Original size : Scanning width A3 *1 , B4 *1 , A4

Communication Protocols • TransmissionSMTP, TCP/IP

• ReceptionPOP3, SMTP, IMAP4, TCP/IP

E-mail format Single/Multi-part, MIME Conversion

Attached file forms: TIFF-F (MH, MR *1 , MMR *1 compression)

Authentication method SMTP-AUTH, POP before SMTP, A-POP

Internet communication Send and receive e-mail with a computer that has an e-mail address

E-mail send functions Automatic conversion of sent documents to e-mail format and e-mail transmission. Memory transmission only.

E-mail receive functions Automatic detection and printing of appended TIFF-F (MH) files and ASCII text. Memory reception only.

JupterC2_Fax_EN-F_FM.book Page 206 Monday, November 29, 2004 3:48 PM

Page 217: b 7128511

Specifications

207

11

❖❖❖❖ IP-Fax Transmission and Reception

Compatible Machines

This machine is compatible to machines having the following specifications.

*1 Available in full mode, depending on the other party's settings.

Network LAN: Local Area Network

Ethernet/10base-T, 100base-TX, IEEE1394 (IP over 1394), IEEE802.11b (wireless LAN)

Scan line density 8 × 3.85mm·200 × 100dpi (Standard character),

8 × 7.7mm, 200 × 200dpi (Detail character),

8 × 15.4mm (Fine character: optional expansion memory required),

16 × 15.4mm, 400 × 400dpi (Super Fine character: optional ex-pansion memory required)

Original size Maximum A3 or 11" × 17" (DLT)

Maximum scanning size Standard: A3, 297mm × 432mm, Irregular: 297mm × 1200mm

Transmission protocol Recommended: T.38 Annex, TCP, UDP/IP communication

Compatible machines IP-Fax compatible machines

IP-Fax transmission function Specify IP address and send fax to an IP-Fax compatible fax through a network.

Also capable of sending fax from a G3 fax connected to tele-phone lines via a VoIP gateway.

IP-Fax reception function Receive a fax sent from an IP-Fax compatible fax through a network.

Also capable of receiving fax from a G3 fax connected to tele-phone lines via a VoIP gateway.

Communication protocols • TransmissionSMTP

• ReceptionPOP3, SMTP, IMAP4

E-mail format • FormatMINE, Base64

• Content-TypeImage/tiffMultipart/mixed (text/plain, Image/tiff (attached file forms))

Data format • ProfileTIFF Profile S

• CodingMH, MR *1 , MMR *1

• Original sizeA3 *1 , A4, B4 *1 , 81/2"×11" *1 , 81/2"×14" *1

• Resolution (dpi)200×100/200×200, 204×98/204×196, 200×400 or 400×400

JupterC2_Fax_EN-F_FM.book Page 207 Monday, November 29, 2004 3:48 PM

Page 218: b 7128511

Appendix

208

11

Acceptable Types of Originals

Make sure your originals are completely dry before setting them in the machine.Wet ink or correcting fluid from originals will mark the exposure glass and affectthe resulting image.

Acceptable original sizes

Paper size and scanned area

❖❖❖❖ Exposure Glass

❖❖❖❖ ADF

Where original is set Acceptable original size Maximum number of sheets

Paper thickness

Exposure glass Up to A3 (297 × 420mm), 11" × 17" (279 × 432mm)

1 ----

ADF, one-sided document

Fax transmission: A5 L to A3 L (up to 1,200mm long) 8" × 51/2" L to 11" × 17"L

80 sheets (80 g/m2, 20 lb)

40-128 g/m2 (11-34 lb)

ADF, two-sided document

Fax transmission: A5 L to A3 L (up to 432mm long) 8" × 51/2" L to 11" × 17"L

80 sheets (80 g/m2, 20 lb)

52-105 g/m2 (14-28 lb)

AAG019S

JupterC2_Fax_EN-F_FM.book Page 208 Monday, November 29, 2004 3:48 PM

Page 219: b 7128511

Specifications

209

11

Limitation❒ There may be a difference in the size of the image when it is printed at the des-

tination.❒ If you place an original larger than A3, 11"×17" on the exposure glass, only an

A3, 11"×17" area is scanned.

Note❒ Even if an original is correctly placed on the exposure glass or in the ADF, a

margin of 3mm (0.1") around each edge of the original may not be sent.❒ If the receiver uses paper of a smaller width than the original, the image will

be reduced to fit that paper. See p.74 “Auto Reduce”.❒ The machine detects paper sizes in the following ways:

• When you place an original in the ADF, an original wider than about264mm (10.4") is scanned as A3, 11" × 17" size. An original narrower than about 230mm (9.1") will be sent as 81/2" × 11" or81/2" × 14" size, and an original narrower than about 264mm (10.4”) isscanned as B4 JIS.Originals up to 1,200mm (47.2") in length can be scanned.

• Refer to the table below for sizes the machine can detect when you placean original on the exposure glass. Because the machine scans non-standardsize documents in a standard size, part of the image may be truncated de-pending on the length of the document. For details about how to set non-standard size documents, see p.15 “Setting a Scan Area”, Facsimile Refer-ence <Basic Features>.

❖❖❖❖ Metric Version

Length *1

–approx. 249mm approx. 249mm– approx. 274mm

approx. 274mm– approx. 316mm

approx. 316mm–

Wid

th

–approx. 243mm

× B5 JISL A4L FL

approx. 243mm– approx. 268mm

B5 JISK B4 JISL B4 JISL B4 JISL

approx. 268mm–

A4K A3L A3L A3L

JupterC2_Fax_EN-F_FM.book Page 209 Monday, November 29, 2004 3:48 PM

Page 220: b 7128511

Appendix

210

11

❖❖❖❖ Inch Version

× - Unable to auto detect*1 Normally a length of about 420mm (16.5") can be scanned; however, it is only possi-

ble to specify a scanning size up to 432mm (17").

----Maximum scan areaThe maximum scan area is shown below:• Memory Transmission: 297 × 1,200mm/11" × 47" (W × L) from the ADF• Immediate Transmission: 297 × 1,200mm/11" × 47" (W × L) from the ADF

Note❒ During Immediate Transmission, the length of the scanning range can be-

come narrower than 1,200mm (47"), depending on the character size aswell as the settings on the destination machine.

• 297 × 432mm/11" × 17" (W × L) (from the exposure glass)

Original sizes difficult to detect

The machine has difficulty detecting the size of the following kinds of originals.(When this happens, the receiving machine may not select print paper of the cor-rect size.)• documents placed on the exposure glass of sizes other than those listed in the

table below• originals with index tabs, tags, or protruding parts• transparent originals, such as OHP transparencies or translucent paper• dark originals with dense text or drawings• originals that contain areas of solid print• originals that have solid print around their edges• originals with glossy surfaces• bound originals of more than 10mm (0.3") in thickness, such as books.

Length *1

–approx. 9.8" approx. 9.8"– ap-prox. 10.8"

approx. 10.8"– approx. 12.4"

approx. 12.4"–

Wid

th

–approx. 9.6"

× × 81/2"×11"L FL

approx. 9.6" – ap-

prox. 10.6"

11"×81/2"K 11"×17"L 11"×17"L 11"×17"L

approx. 10.6"–

11"×81/2"K 11"×17"L 11"×17"L 11"×17"L

JupterC2_Fax_EN-F_FM.book Page 210 Monday, November 29, 2004 3:48 PM

Page 221: b 7128511

Specifications

211

11

The following paper sizes are automatically detected in facsimile mode.

❖❖❖❖ Metric Version

b- Auto detect× - Unable to auto detect

❖❖❖❖ Inch Version

b- Auto detect× - Unable to auto detect

Paper size where origi-nal is placed

A3L 8 1/2"×13" (F4)

B4 JIS L A4KL B5 JISKL A5KL

Exposure glass

b b b b b ×

ADF b b b b b b

Paper size where original is placed

11"×17"L 8 1/2"×14" L 8 1/2"×11" KL 5 1/2"×8 1/2" K

Exposure glass b b b ×

ADF b b b b

JupterC2_Fax_EN-F_FM.book Page 211 Monday, November 29, 2004 3:48 PM

Page 222: b 7128511

Appendix

212

11

Maximum Values

The following list contains the maximum value for each item.

Note❒ The maximum number of pages that can be stored or transmitted may de-

crease depending on the contents of documents.

*1 This indicates the number of transmission records that you can check using Smart-DeviceMonitor for Admin. From the machine you can check up to 400 communica-tion records (transmission plus reception).

Item Standard Expansion memory (Optional)

Memory (with optional) 4 MB 28 MB

The number of pages that you can store in memory (Using A4 size Standard <ITU-T #4Chart> )

Approx. 320 Approx. 2,240

Total number of all documents 400 400

The number of pages per file 1,000 1,000

The number of pages for all files 1,000 3,000

The number of destinations you can spec-ify for one file

500 500

The number of destinations you can spec-ify for all files

500 500

The number of Quick Dials you can program 2,000 2,000

The number of Group Dials you can program 100 100

The number of destinations you can pro-gram in a group

500 500

The number of digits for Dials 128 128

The number of Programs you can register 100 100

The number of Auto Documents you can program

6 6

The number of Standard Message Stamps you can program

3 3

The number of transmission records the machine can store

200 200

The number of stored documents you can specify at one time

1,000 1,000

The number of stored documents you can send at one time

30 30

The number of pages that you can store in the Document Server (Using ITU-T #4Chart )

Approx. 9,000 Approx. 9,000

The number of pages you can store in the Document Server for one document

1,000 1,000

JupterC2_Fax_EN-F_FM.book Page 212 Monday, November 29, 2004 3:48 PM

Page 223: b 7128511

213

INDEX

180-Degree Rotation Printing, 982 Sided Printing, 97

A

Address Book, 118Administrator Settings, 155Administrator Tools List, 155Authorized Reception, 172Auto Document, 65, 158

Changing, 158Deleting, 159Sending, 65Storing, 158

Auto Fax Reception Power-up, 95Automatic Redial, 78Auto Reduce, 74

B

Basic Transmission, 112Batch Transmission, 78Book Fax, 61Box Setting, 156, 180

C

CancelingTransmission, 19

Center Mark, 96Chain Dial, 47Checkered Mark, 96Checking

Transmission Result (TX File Status), 31Combine 2 originals, 83Combine Two originals, 99Communication Failure Report, 82Communication Information, 27Communication Result Report

(Memory Transmission), 81Confidential File Report, 37Confidential ID, 191Confidential Message, 36Confidential Transmission, 9Counters, 155, 162

D

Default ID/Free Polling Reception, 14Default ID Transmission, 11, 12, 74Deleting

Information Box Messages, 45programmed destinations, 119

DestinationAdding, 21Checking, 18Deleting, 20

Displaying the Memory Status, 33Document Server, 133

Delete File, 138Manage File, 136Storing a Document, 134

Dual Access, 78

E

ECM (Error Correction Mode), 155, 165Economy Transmission Time, 3E-mail transfer, 94E-mail TX Results, 80, 116End Receiver, 163Error Mail Notification, 199Error Report, 197Error Report (E-Mail), 199Expansion Memory, 204Extra G3 Interface Unit, 204

F

Fax Header Print, 73Fax via Computer, 107File

Printing, 23Printing a List of Files

in Memory (Print TX File List), 25Resending, 24

Forwarding, 90, 155, 162, 173Free Polling Transmission, 11, 12Full/Partial agreement, 171

G

General Settings/Adjustment, 144

H

Handy Dialing Functions, 47

JupterC2_Fax_EN-F_FM.book Page 213 Monday, November 29, 2004 3:48 PM

Page 224: b 7128511

214

I

ID Override Polling Reception, 14ID Override Transmission, 11Image Rotation, 79, 99Immediate Reception, 83Immediate TX Result Report

(Immediate Transmission), 82Information Boxes, 42, 185

Changing, 184Deleting, 185Printing, 190Programming, 184Storing Messages, 42

J

JBIG, 79, 95Reception, 95Transmission, 79

Journal, 27Journal by E-mail, 80Journal by E-mail, Transmitting, 80Just size printing, 103

K

Keystroke Program, 129

L

Label Insertion, 73LAN-Fax Operation Messages, 122LAN-Fax Properties, Setting, 110Line Type

Changing, 59Selecting, 202

M

Manual Dial, 58Maximum Value, 212Memory Lock, 38, 165, 174Memory Lock ID, 192Memory Reception, 83Memory Status, 33Memory Storage Report, 81More Transmission Functions, 77Multi-copy, 83Multi-copy Reception, 98Multi-port, 59Multistep Transfer, 88

O

On Hook Dial, 56Optional Equipment, 204Originals, 208Output Tray, 105

P

Page Reduction, 101Page Separation and Length Reduction, 100Paper Tray, 147Parallel Memory Transmission, 77Parameter Setting, 155Personal Boxes, 40, 181, 183

Changing, 181Deleting, 183Printing, 190Programming, 181

Polling ID, 192Polling Reception, 14Polling Reserve Report, 16Polling Result Report, 16Polling Transmission, 11Polling Transmission Clear Report, 13Power Failure Report, 198Print 2 Sided, 173Print Completion Beep, 96Printed Report, 81Printing

Box List, 190Confidential Message, 36File Received with Memory Lock, 38Information Box Messages, 44Journal, 27Options, 96Personal Box Messages, 41Special Sender List, 180

Printing and Saving, 118Priority trays, 102Programs, 129

Changing, 129Deleting, 131Registering, 129

PWD Code, 51

Q

Quick Operation key, 146

JupterC2_Fax_EN-F_FM.book Page 214 Monday, November 29, 2004 3:48 PM

Page 225: b 7128511

215

R

RDS (Remote Diagnostic System), 198Receiving Station, 52, 87Reception, 83

Reception Features, 83Reception File Print Quantity, 173Reception Functions, 87Reception Reverse Printing, 174Reception Settings, 147Reception Time, 97

Reception Result (RX File Status), 32Redial, 47Reduced Image Transmission, 74Report, 81

Communication Failure Report, 82Communication Result Report

(Memory Transmission), 81Error Report, 197Immediate TX Result Report

(Immediate Transmission), 82Memory Storage Report, 81Power Failure Report, 198

Requesting Party, 52, 87Reverse Order Printing, 83, 100RX File Status, 32

S

Scan Size, 160Changing, 160Deleting, 160Programming, 160

Scan sizeDeleting, 161

SelectingDial/Push Phone, 193

Send Later, 3SEP Code, 50Server-Generated Error E-mail, 199SID Code, 50Simultaneous Broadcast, 79SMTP, 93SMTP reception, 92Special Senders, 171Special Senders to Treat Differently, 171Specifications, 205Stamp, 72Standard Messages, 157

Deleting, 158Programming, 157

Standard Message Stamp, 64SUB Code, 49, 91Substitute Reception, 85Switches and Bits, 166

T

Telephone Line, 201Transfer Boxes, 189

Changing, 186Deleting, 189Printing, 190Programming, 186

Transfer Report, 190Transfer Request, 52Transfer Result Report, 88Transfer Result Report

(transfer request by e-mail), 89Transferring, 91Transfer Station, 52, 87Transmission Features, 47Transmission Mode, 3Transmission Options, 73Transmission Time

Changing, 22Transmission with Image Rotation, 79Tray for Lines, 105Tray Shift, 105TSI Print, 101Two-Sided Printing, 97Two-Sided Transmission, 62TX File, 18TX File Status, 31

U

User Parameter List, 167User Parameters, 166

JupterC2_Fax_EN-F_FM.book Page 215 Monday, November 29, 2004 3:48 PM

Page 226: b 7128511

216 EN USA B712-8511

MEMO

JupterC2_Fax_EN-F_FM.book Page 216 Monday, November 29, 2004 3:48 PM

Page 227: b 7128511

Paper type: OK Prince Eco G100(55kg), Paper Thickness=80 µm // Pages in book=224 // Print scale=81%Gap (when printed at 81% scale) = Pages in book × Paper thickness / 2 = 8.960000 mm

Introduction

This manual contains detailed instructions and notes on the operation and use of this machine. For yoursafety and benefit, read this manual carefully before using the machine. Keep this manual in a handyplace for quick reference.

Notes

Some illustrations in this manual might be slightly different from the machine.

Certain options might not be available in some countries. For details, please contact your local dealer.

Two kinds of size notation are employed in this manual. With this machine refer to the inch version.

Important

Contents of this manual are subject to change without prior notice. In no event will the company be li-able for direct, indirect, special, incidental, or consequential damages as a result of handling or oper-ating the machine.

Trademarks

Microsoft®, Windows® and Windows NT® are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in theUnited States and/or other countries.

Adobe® and Acrobat® are registered trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated.

Ethernet is a registered trademark of Xerox Corporation.

Other product names used herein are for identification purposes only and might be trademarks of theirrespective companies. We disclaim any and all rights to those marks.

Note

The proper names of the Windows operating systems are as follows:

• The product name of Windows® 95 is Microsoft® ScanRouter.

• The product name of Windows® 98 is Microsoft® Windows 98.

• The product name of Windows® Me is Microsoft® Windows Millennium Edition (Windows Me).

• The product names of Windows® 2000 are as follows:Microsoft® Windows® 2000 Advanced ServerMicrosoft® Windows® 2000 ServerMicrosoft® Windows® 2000 Professional

• The product names of Windows® XP are as follows:Microsoft® Windows® XP ProfessionalMicrosoft® Windows® XP Home Edition

• The product names of the Windows ServerTM 2003 are as follows:Microsoft® Windows ServerTM 2003 Standard EditionMicrosoft® Windows ServerTM 2003 Enterprise EditionMicrosoft® Windows ServerTM 2003 Web Edition

• The product names of Windows NT® 4.0 are as follows:Microsoft® Windows NT® Server 4.0

• Microsoft® Windows NT® Workstation 4.0

Copyright © 2005

Page 228: b 7128511

Paper type: OK Prince Eco G100(55kg), Paper Thickness=80 µm // Pages in book=224 // Print scale=81%Gap (when printed at 81% scale) = Pages in book × Paper thickness / 2 = 8.960000 mm

FAX Option Type 3245Operating Instructions

Facsimile Reference <Advanced Features>

B7128511

FAX

Option Type 3245

Operating Instructions

Facsimile Reference <A

dvanced Features>

FAX Option Type 3245

Operating Instructions

Facsimile Reference<Advanced Features>

Read this manual carefully before you use this machine and keep it handy for future reference. For safe and correct use, be sure to read the SafetyInformation in the “General Settings Guide” before using the machine.

Transmission Mode

Checking and Canceling Transmission Files

Communication Information

Other Transmission Features

Reception Features

Fax via Computer

Simplifying the Operation

Facsimile Features

Administrator Setting

Solving Operation Problems

Appendix

Printed in Japan

EN USA B712-8511